THE 

UNKNOWN MADE KNOWN 



AN EXPLANATION OF THE DESIGN AND 
PURPOSE OF CREATION 



MAJOR FRED. F. B. COFFIN 




Class _ _3I 
Book 
Copyright N° _ 

COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 




MAJOR COFFIN TKYING THE EXPERIMENT WITH SWINGING KNIFE. 

See Page 140. 



ClK 

Unknown ffiadeHnown 



OR 



An Explanation of the Design and 
Purpose of Creation 



BY 

/ 

MAJOR FRED. F. B. COFFIN 



THE 



Sbbey Press 

PUBLISHERS 

114 

FIFTH AVENUE 

London NEW YORK Montreal 



RARY OF 

-ESS, 

Two Copies Received 

FEB 6 1903 

Copyright Entry 

dMr-. h-tc\ f3 

CLASS ^ XXc. No. 
COPY B. 



Copyright 190a, 

by 

THE 



• "I •** ••• ! «r •"• •*• ••; ••• 



# 



** x 






TO MY LOVING WIFE, 

SUSANNA BARNETT COFFIN. 

THIS BOOK 

IS 

AFFECTIONATELY DEDICATED 

BY 

FRED. F. B. COFFIN. 



CONTENTS. 



PAGE 

V 



Preface • 

Introduction 9 



I. 

II. In the Beginning - 

III. The Dawn of Life 

IV. Instinct and Dawn of Intelligence 
V. The Dawn of Reason . • . 

VI. The Soul or Spirit of Man . 

VII. Light and Sound 

VIII. Nervous System — Anatomy 

IX. Thought and Force .... 

X. The Soul Spiritually Considered. 

XL Relations of Thought to Brain 

XII. Evidences of a Supreme Being 

XIII. Summary and Conclusion . . 



16 

32 

44 

52 

61 

75 

85 

139 

181 

200 

239 

255 



PREFACE. 

In presenting this book to the public we confess to a 
feeling of trepidation. While we candidly believe 
that the statements made are true, we fear that some 
blunder has been made, by which our meaning has 
been left obscure, or that some important statement 
has ben omitted that has broken the chain of thought. 
We are conscious that there is nothing so easily made 
as a mistake. With this thought prominently before 
us we are reminded that an early revision may be neces- 
sary to prune out that which is needless, and to supply 
that which is essential. However, we will not cross 
streams till we reach them, and in the meantime we 
will await results with suppressed concern. 

However simple the contents of this book may ap- 
pear to the heartless critic, it has been to us a cause of 
the deepest concern and most researchful thought. 
Many of the problems have risen up before us in such 
formidable proportions that we felt incompetent to 
surmount them. To turn back would be cowardice 
and show a want of faith in the verity of our assump- 
tions. The enemy was on one side, the mountains on 
the other, and the sea was in front. Cross the sea we 
must. But how ? was the question. By constant and 
continued effort a way was opened, that we believe 
is the true way. We believe that the analyses given in 
the following pages will clear away the fog from many 



vi Preface. 

scientific and theological problems. This, by no means, 
is said in a boastful spirit, but because we sincerely be- 
lieve that a key has been discovered by which many 
problems, heretofore considered forbidden fruit, will 
easily yield to a solution. We believe that the explana- 
tion of how sensation reaches, and communicates with 
consciousness, or the soul, and what thought is, and 
how it is produced, will be of inestimable value to the 
inquiring mind. We trust that our explanation of 
what thought is, and how it is produced, what the soul 
is and the divine purpose in reference thereto, will be 
a lamp to the feet of many who are now wandering in 
the darkness. But we will not weary the reader with 
tiresome preliminaries indefinitely prolonged in a hori- 
zontal direction, but bespeak a candid, thoughtful, 
charitable consideration of the facts presented, and the 
line of thought pursued. 

We might say to the reader that the facts and 
thoughts herewith presented have been culled along 
life's pathway during the years that have passed. 
Some of the solutions have been worked out while 
riding across the prairie, in a lumber wagon, from 
our former home, "fifteen miles away," to our trading 
point and post office, sometimes with the thermometer 
30 degrees below zero. Some of the thoughts came 
to us in the silent wakeful hours of the night. Some 
came to us while listening to a public speaker trying to 
explain something that he did not himself understand. 
Some of the thoughts came to us after patient search 
through authorities, when an accidental ray of light 



Preface. vii 

would afford a thread to follow which would lead us 
out of the darkness. 

The question now is, is all this true philosophy? or 
is it but the idle wanderings of an addled brain ? 

Fred. F. B. Coffin. 

Huron, S. D. 
October 20, 1901, 



CHAPTER I. 



INTRODUCTION. 



The subjects treated in the following pages stub- 
bornly refuse to be constructively arranged. Each, to 
a great extent, demands to be treated separately and 
independently. But we have done the best we could 
to secure the semblance of a succession. We have en- 
deavored in all our analyses to begin at "the begin- 
ning." We do not construct or formulate a theory or 
theories upon which to construct our solution, but we 
endeavor to adhere strictly and rigidly to acknowledge 
facts in science and anatomy. We simply try to put 
known facts together so as to make them intelligible. 
Permit us to tell a story to illustrate the idea we wish 
to convey. While living in northwestern Indiana, our 
nearest neighbor was a Swedish family. One day one 
of the little boys came to me and said that his parents, 
sometime before that, had put two five dollar bills in 
the till of the chest, and that the mice had cut them 
all up into bits, and wanted to know if there was any 
way to get the money back. I told him to bring all 
the little bits he could find to me, and I would see 
what could be done. This he did. I took the little 
bunch of bits of paper, that were absolutely meaning- 
less in their present shape and sent them to the Treas- 
ury Department at Washington, with a statement of the 
facts. These meaningless bits of paper were placed in 



io The Unknown Made Known. 

the hands of an expert who was familiar with the 
engravings of national currency. He took two pieces 
of tissue paper the size of a bill and pasted these bits 
of paper where they belonged. Although about half 
of the bills had been destroyed, there was enough left, 
so that when properly arranged, by looking across the 
face of the bill it could be read, and the bank to which 
it belonged could be told. One was on a bank in the 
state of New York, and the other on a bank in Penn- 
sylvania. The necessary affidavits with the fragmen- 
tary bills were sent and redemption came. 

That little incident has been a great benefit to the 
writer in many ways. There are many little facts that 
seem to be insignificant, yet they are a part of a whole 
that has taken wisdom and intelligence to contrive, 
and systematic effort to execute. Sometimes a com- 
paratively insignificant incident will attract our atten- 
tion, and when we attempt to trace out its associations 
we find we have a key to the solution of important 
problems that had hitherto baffled our skill. When we 
discovered that we could make a knife swing by an 
effort of the will (see p. 140, ch. 9), it let in a flood 
of light on many hitherto dark problems. The fact that 
thought had force raised the inquiry : whence force ? 
We began to trace back to find original, initial force 
and found no stopping place till we got to the Supreme 
Being. In attempting to go beyond the Supreme Be- 
ing we found that we were invariably reflected back, 
because there was no beyond. Then the thought 
flashed upon us, that all we do or accomplish directly 
or indirectly is the result of thought and thought is 



Introduction. u 

force, or the result of force, and as the Supreme Being 
is the source of original or initial force, His means 
of communicating with His creatures is by the exer- 
cise of force in some way. This made the purpose and 
utility of vibrations as a means of communication as 
plain as the midday sun. This made telepathy, hypno- 
tism, and thought-transference readily resolvable into 
a proposition easy of solution. We have in the fol- 
lowing pages gone into the analysis or solution of these 
various phenomena so thoroughly, that he who runs 
may read. 

In the following pages we have endeavored to adhere 
closely to facts, and to arrange these facts so that the 
great purpose of creation can be easily read. We are 
utterly at a loss to know how to account for system 
and design without a designer. We are at a loss to 
account for a plan without a purpose, and at greater 
loss to be able to account for plan and purpose without 
a pre-existent intelligence. To make the plan and pur- 
pose successful the pre-existing intelligence must be 
supreme. We can find no other position that is unas- 
sailable. This course of reasoning induces us to as- 
sume that there is a supreme, omnipotent, and omnis- 
cient intelligence that precedes everything. That 
that supreme intelligence acts through uniform laws 
and uniform forces. That these laws and forces are 
created for a preconceived purpose, and hence are ab- 
solutely unchangeable and irrevocable. That there is 
nothing in all the universe that is an afterthought, or 
was brought forth to fill a vacancy, or what would 
otherwise be a void, or an oversight. When an archi- 



12 The Unknown Made Known. 

tect plans a building and the workmen take the plan 
and commence the erection of the building, they com- 
mence at the foundation. The fact that the ridge-board 
on the roof was the last thing made does not prove that 
its conception was not coexistent with the foundation. 
This idea we have kept in view in all our analyses. 
Every thing has its order and its time. Every law and 
force in nature is working for the accomplishment of 
some great end. The Supreme Being is the cause of 
life and law and force, is the life of law and force — and 
without that life could not act or exist. 

We know that spirit and matter in their mature 
state are radically different. We also know that there 
is a point where spirit becomes so materialized or mat- 
ter becomes so spiritualized, or both, that they meet 
and communicate. Wherever this point is there is 
nature's secret laboratory or sanctum sanctorum. 
Every one knows that in some way his spiritual nature 
communicates with his physical nature. The spiritual 
or intellectual directs, and the arm strikes the blow. 
Without the cooperation of spirit and matter the uni- 
verse could not exist. In all these dual operations 
the spiritual is inductive and the physical is receptive. 
The question here naturally arises, how is this com- 
munication accomplished? We answer, by vibrations, 
or intermittent force. We have no knowledge of any 
other universal language. This certainly establishes 
the fact that spirit possesses the power or quality of 
exerting force. The Supreme Being possesses initial 
force, all created spiritual beings have delegated power 
to exert force. 



Introduction, 13 

In the following pages we have endeavored to show 
some of the ways by which this force is exerted by one 
being in order to communicate with another being. 
It is absurd to think that the Supreme Being possessing 
this initial power to exert force, intermittent or other- 
wise, would be cut off from any means of communi- 
cating with His own created beings. We know that 
these created beings have power to communicate with 
each other. No power can be delegated that is not pos- 
sessed by the grantor. No man ever made a machine 
without providing means by which he could control it. 
It would be an absurdity to suppose that the Creator 
would create beings without providing means by which 
He could exercise control over them when so desired. 

In the 8th chapter we have given the anatomy of the 
cerebro-spinal axis according to Gray's anatomy. The 
reader, if so desired, can use this chapter as a reference. 
We give this in order that the reader may see the com- 
plicated structure of the brain and its accompanying 
ganglions and bodies. The functions of many of these 
are not known, but when known will doubtless shed 
much light on many difficult complications. 

In the nth chapter we give the recent discoveries 
of Dr. J. Luys in the anatomy of the cerebrum. By 
this we are enabled, with reasonable certainty to locate 
the seat of consciousness, a very important discovery. 

We are also enabled by the same means to trace 
very clearly the process by which sensation, a physical, 
or physiological manifestation, is worked over or trans- 
formed into conception or perception, a spiritual or 
metaphysical manifestation, and to show where and 



14 The Unknown Made Known. 

how thought is the intermediate agent. All writers on 
philosophy, psychology and metaphysics, agree that 
sensation is a physical or physiological manifestation 
or process. They then step over, what they consider 
a yawning abyss, and tell us that perception and con- 
ception are purely spiritual or metaphysical manifesta- 
tions, but fail to tell us how the transformation is ef- 
fected. They simply say that ' 'there is a special order 
of mental activity which works over sense data into 
rational forms," and then run off and leave the prob- 
lem unsolved, shouting back to us that that is one of 
nature's unsolvable mysteries. 

We think we explain this whole intermediate proc- 
ess simply and clearly so that any ordinary person can 
understand it. 

Throughout the entire book we have tried to support 
the idea that natural development has proceeded by 
regular succession, and that this has been accomplished 
by accretion and not by evolution strictly. That each 
higher order has been produced by adding some new 
quality to a lower order by the Creator, and has not 
been the result of some mysterious, imaginary in- 
herent quality, or power in an inferior being by which 
it could produce a superior being. 

We have tried to show the design and purpose of 
creation in their true light. We did not start out with 
any pet fad or theory to brace up with ingenious 
reasoning. But in commencing this work we endeav- 
ored to divest ourselves of prejudice and preconceived 
ideas, and to try to follow wherever the lamp of rea- 
son or the pathway of truth might direct our foot- 



Introduction. 15 

steps. We believe there is no goal so desirable as 
that which is enshrouded in righteousness, and no 
position so impregnable as truth. We are conscious 
that the bulwark of prejudice is a formidable fortress, 
and only capitulates after being persistently and con- 
tinuously assailed. We have seen the bitterest and 
most determined opposition to the sciences of geology 
and phrenology quietly disappear, and to see those who 
once combated those sciences as dangerous heresies, 
take the amusing position of proving the verity of cer- 
tain doctrines that they once thought endangered by 
them, by arguments deduced from these sciences. 
Thus truth steadily moves forward with an irresistible 
impetus that causes error and superstition to vanish 
at its approach. 



CHAPTER II. 

IN THE BEGINNING. 

Sacred history begins wkh the significant declara- 
tion, "In the beginning." It is a safe and fitting model 
to follow. In tracing nature back to the beginning we 
soon pass the limit of the senses. We then have to de- 
pend upon the reason, analogy, and upon the uniform 
and unvarying laws of nature to guide us in our re- 
searches. In proceeding with our investigations, in 
order to keep from being lost, it is necessary to keep 
within the bounds of known facts, to keep our foot- 
steps in the path indicated by natural laws, remember- 
ing that they are unvarying and infallible; that there 
is not one set of laws for one purpose and perhaps an- 
other set of conflicting laws for another purpose ; that 
the laws of the universe are the handiwork of an in- 
finitely perfect and all-wise Creator who makes no mis- 
takes and commits no blunders. Thus intrenched we 
feel that we are upon safe grounds, and can proceed 
with our investigations fearlessly. 

Scientists teach us that all material, tangible bodies 
are composed of elements, and these elements in turn 
are composed of molecules, and molecules are composed 
of atoms ultimate or otherwise. 

Some scientists think that every material body or 
substance has its ultimate, primary, parent atom, that is 
peculiar to that body or substance, that this atom is 



In the Beginning. 17 

absolutely indestructible and indivisible. Other scien- 
tists think that there is a primordial atom that is the 
absolute base of all matter, that a certain or given com- 
bination of primary atoms make a secondary atom 
which is the base of the different bodies or substances. 
Scientists of the latter opinion assume that in searching 
for the beginning we must search for unity ; that is, in 
saying different bodies can be formed by different com- 
binations of the same material, they reason from an- 
alogy. To illustrate this thought, take a single ex- 
ample. In the compounds of mercury we have the 
dichloride of mercury, composed of two equivalents 
of mercury and one of chlorine, with the symbol Hg 2 Cl. 
This gives us a common drug called calomel. Then 
take another compound known as chloride of mercury 
composed of equal equivalents of chlorine and mercury 
with the symbol HgCl, and we have what is commonly 
called corrosive sublimate, a virulent poison. Here we 
have two entirely different substances composed of the 
same ingredients only in different proportions. Many 
similar examples might be cited, but this is enough to 
give us a key with which we may be enabled to un- 
lock many of nature's secrets. We will not enter into 
a discussion as to which class of scientists is right. 
That would lead us into the realm of speculation, and 
we desire to keep as clear of that as possible. We will 
simply try to pursue nature's footsteps and let con- 
clusions follow. 

In order to get a starting point let us trace nature 
from the known to the unknown, from the visible to the 
invisible, carefully keeping within safe, logical, analo- 



1 8 The Unknown Made Known. 

gous, reasonable bounds, and see where we will land. 
Commencing with the most refractory solids, as we 
proceed, we discover that they become less and less 
resisting, more and more yielding, until we find we are 
among the liquids without having discovered the line 
of demarkation that separates them. Even so com- 
mon an article as water, under certain conditions of 
temperature becomes quite a firm solid. While on the 
other hand so firm a solid as iron under certain con- 
ditions of temperature becomes a liquid. Here is a 
fact, not a theory. Let us hold fast to this fact that 
matter imperceptibly passes from one condition to an- 
other. It will be of benefit to us further on. 

Passing along down through the liquids we find 
them more and more volatile until we find ourselves 
in the gases without having discovered the separating 
line. Even common air under certain conditions of 
pressure and temperature becomes liquid. Here we 
find the same conditions exist that we found in passing 
from solids to liquids. 

We begin to think that we have discovered one of 
nature's laws, that one form of matter imperceptibly 
passes into another form without any sharply defined 
line of demarkation. But let us proceed, this investi- 
gation is getting interesting. Examining the gases we 
find that they possess certain qualities which are com- 
mon to matter. They have weight, elasticity, they 
possess resistance. We find some of the gases so at- 
tenuated that they cannot be reached by the ordinary 
senses. We have to reach them by the intellect through 
the indirect means of apparatus. By this means we 



In the Beginning. 19 

find they possess the three principal qualities of gases, 
weight, elasticity, and resistance. As we pass out of 
the gases we find ourselves in the luminiferous ether, 
a substance or essence so attenuated that it baffles our 
skill to classify it. It possesses neither weight nor re- 
sistance. Prof. John Tyndall says it is composed of 
molecules and atoms. It pervades all space and all sub- 
stance. No substance is so dense or compact but it 
passes freely through it. Hence no vacuum can be 
formed. When we consider that it pervades all stellar 
space and that it offers no resistance to the heavenly 
bodies in their rapid flight, we begin to realize how at- 
tenuated it must be. Yet it possesses at least one of the 
properties of matter, it has elasticity, and to that ex- 
tent it is material. It is the vehicle through which the 
waves of light pass through space. When we consider 
the marvelous rapidity with which the waves of light 
travel through space we begin to realize how wonder- 
fully elastic it must be. The thought of an atomic an- 
alysis staggers the intellect. The most powerful micro- 
scope that mortal man could make would be a mockery. 
It would be like constructing a microscope to examine 
the attraction of gravitation. It is evidently a sub- 
stance; but so ethereal that it is beyond the power of 
man to reach it by any means that he possesses. We 
are now far out from our starting point. When we 
started we were on the solid rock, we are now stand- 
ing upon the most attenuated substance known in 
nature. What shall we do? Shall we turn back, or 
shall we attempt to go on? As a mariner would say, 
let us take observations and see where we stand. When 



20 The Unknown Made Known. 

we started out we thought we discovered a law that 
would be to us what the mariner's compass is to him, 
an infallible guide to keep us in our course. That 
matter passes from one form to another without any 
perceptible line of demarkation. In the luminiferous 
ether what have we found? We have found a sub- 
stance that has one property common to gases, that is 
elasticity. To that extent then it must be matter. But 
what is the rest of it? If it is not matter what is it? 
There is but one thing known to man that will answer 
every requirement, that is spirit or having the nature 
of spirit. If there is such a thing or entity as spirit 
we are certainly approaching it, and must be very near- 
ly to it. 

For the sake of convenience we will assume that 
there is such a thing or essence as spirit, with the under- 
standing that this question will be more elaborately 
discussed further on. It is plain and logical that in 
leaving matter there is no other place to go but to 
spirit. It is also plain that we are on the borderland 
of spirit. It is also plain that the ground we are stand- 
ing on is neither matter nor spirit in its entirety. By 
every rational and logical consideration we are irresist- 
ibly driven to the conclusion that there is a point where 
matter and spirit meet and communicate. As spirit 
from the very nature of the case must antedate matter, 
so matter is an offspring or creature of spirit. One 
step further and we pass to the domain of spirit. We 
are in the spirit land. In other words we are with God. 
Now comes rushing up before us that imperishable 



In the Beginning. 21 

declaration in the first chapter of Genesis : "In the be- 
ginning, God." 

We are now standing side by side with God looking 
out, seeing if we can unravel the mystery of the plan 
and course of that puzzling problem, creation. Leav- 
ing God, the first thing we meet is matter in its atomic 
form. We also discover that these primitive atoms of 
matter are drawn together, and we further discover 
that this is done in a very orderly and systematic man- 
ner. Now what have we discovered? We have dis- 
covered nature's great trinity, Matter, Force, Lazv; 
without which nothing is made, with which all things 
are made. Now it is perfectly plain that atomic inert 
matter never could and never did create force. Such 
an act requires the highest order of intelligence and 
power ; matter possesses no such attributes. 

We are aware that we have come to the parting of 
the ways. Those who believe in what is generally 
called evolution, deny that matter was created by a 
Supreme Being or was in any way an emanation from 
a Supreme Being, who is the ruler and governor of the 
universe. But they say matter in some form simply 
existed or came into existence by some means to them 
unknown ; that force or attraction, either the attraction 
of gravitation, the attraction of cohesion, chemical af- 
finity, or elective affinity, is an inherent property of 
matter ; that there is no such thing as inert matter con- 
ceivable, that matter and its properties are inseparable. 
Hence matter acts of its own force. The law that in 
any way governs it or its actions is simply its peculiar 
or accidental environment. The universe with its in- 



22 The Unknown Made Known. 

finitely varied organisms came about in this way, with- 
out a preconceived design. They deny that the uni- 
verse is the result of the design and infinite creative 
power of a Supreme Being. Hence to be consistent 
they must deny the existence of a Supreme Being; for 
according to their hypothesis He would have nothing 
to do, and there would be no place or function in the 
universe for Him. One step further, with this theory of 
creation, or the existence of things and it is impossible 
to believe in a future or eternal life for man. For 
according to this theory, for theory it is, if man had 
an immortal soul, at the death of the body his soul 
would be set free in vacant space without a home 
or habitation or purpose — a condition that is so cold 
and comfortless that it is simply revolting to contem- 
plate. 

When these gentlemen discover some way to haul 
railway trains and propel machinery without some kind 
of generated or imprisoned power, in other words dis- 
cover perpetual motion, they may then with some con- 
sistency talk about a self-creating universe. Other- 
wise they will have to excuse us for not believing that 
nothing can create something out of nothing. 

In a future chapter or chapters, it is the purpose 
to discuss the evidences of the existence of a personal 
soul or spirit in man, and of the existence of a Supreme 
Being. Therefore, the further and more thorough dis- 
cussion of this subject is deferred until it comes up in 
its proper place. 

We will now resume where we left ofT before the 
above digression. There is but one source conceiv- 



In the Beginning. 23 

able by the mind of man from which force could ema- 
nate and that is from a Supreme Being. Again law is 
not the creature of force and matter or either of them. 
Law is a rule of action or government. Matter and 
force, to create anything, must have a systematic rule 
of action, that would be law. Hence the proposition 
that matter and force created law doubles upon itself 
and proves its absurdity. 

We have now three great primary elements, great 
in their possibilities. What are they ? What is matter ? 
Some one may say, "why, matter is a tangible sub- 
stance, we can feel it, we can see it, we can taste it, we 
can become familiar with its properties and the laws 
that govern it." All of which may be true as to its 
gross state. But that does not tell what it is. Some- 
times it is tangible and sometimes it is not. The fact 
is we do not know what matter really is, only that it is 
the opposite of spirit, or the counterpart of spirit. 
The universe is composed of matter and spirit. We 
have shown that we can trace matter back till we land 
in spirit, hence we are led to believe that matter had 
its origin in spirit, and is therefore not coexistent with 
spirit. All the processes and operations of nature are 
in evidence that this proposition is true. The idea that 
there is a supreme original spirit that is the author and 
creator of all things cannot be maintained without ad- 
mitting the above proposition. It is true we do not 
understand how the idea of matter was conceived, we 
simply deal with facts as we find them. Again, what 
is force? Force does not possess intelligence. It is 



24 The Unknown Made Known. 

limited in its operations by fixed laws. It acts with 
uniformity and continuously under like circumstances. 
Under no circumstances is it intermittent or varying. 
Without it there could be no universe. It possesses 
neither displacement nor weight, in this respect it re- 
sembles spirit. It is subject to law and in this way 
alone can it be controlled. It possesses quantity but 
not volume. We can by certain operations ascertain 
the degree of force but we cannot measure its volume 
for it does not occupy space by displacement. 

The substance of the heavenly bodies are held to- 
gether by force. They are driven forward in their 
course by force. They are held in the path of their 
orbits by force acting in each case in obedience to fixed 
and unvarying law. The table on which I write would 
crumble to dust instantly if it were not for the force 
that hold its particles together. Our bodies are held 
together by force, else they would instantly fall into 
atomic dust. If force acted differently from what it 
does, in any particular, if it was intermittent or in any 
way disobedient to law, the universe would be a chaotic 
bedlam in the twinkling of an eye, Matter and force 
are coexistent in their effects, like the life of a man 
and his body, each has its individual existence, but 
each is powerless without the other. Matter can be 
acted on only by force. Force can act only upon mat- 
ter, hence the thought, entertained by some, that mat- 
ter and force are inseparable, or that one is inherent 
in the other. But let us look into this further. We 
might say that the life of the ox is inherent in the ox, 
brt the life existed first, and caused the ox in his or- 



In the Beginning. 25 

ganized form to come into existence. We throw a ball, 
while the ball is in motion there is an active force, when 
the ball stops the force disappears, if the force was 
inherent in the ball it would continue in motion. 

Lastly, what is law? Law is neither matter nor 
spirit, it is a rule of action. In this case it is an in- 
flexible rule, from the fact that the laws of the uni- 
verse could not possibly be otherwise than what they 
are. They cannot be revoked nor changed for that 
would bring on a conflict that would be disastrous. A 
condition that it is impossible to conceive under the 
supervision of a Supreme Being. If force were left to 
act upon matter without law, we would instantly have 
inextricable chaos. Vegetable and animal life and 
growth would instantly cease. The worlds would clash. 
The light of the sun and stars would go out, darkness 
impenetrable and confusion inextricable would reign 
throughout space. Hence we see the wisdom and ne- 
cessity for law. Whence law? Matter cannot create 
or originate law. Matter simply exists. Force is blind 
and unreasoning and can accomplish nothing unless 
directed by law. We must look elsewhere for the 
source and cause of law. There is no place to look but 
to the Supreme Being. 

We have here the three great potent primary ele- 
ments in nature. How simple yet how effective ! We 
find them ever present in all the diversified works and 
operations of the universe. What a wonderful proof 
of the wisdom, power, and knowledge of the great 
Architect of the universe! 

Man makes a mimic attempt to make laws, but they 



26 The Unknown Made Known. 

all bear the imprint of their enactor. Here we have 
evidence that if man in his present imperfect state is the 
crowning act of creation it is a disastrous failure. 

Matter for the purpose for which it was created is 
absolutely perfect. Force for the purpose for which 
it was created is absolutely perfect. Law for the pur- 
pose for which it was created is absolutely perfect. 
The fact that matter, force and law are perfect proves 
conclusively their perfect origin. The proposition 
doubles upon itself and proves itself. 

At the threshold of the great questions that lie in 
the limitless field that spreads out before us, let us 
understand one thing and impress it upon our memory. 
Nature in all that she does commences infinitely small 
and builds by accretion. That is, it begins at the be- 
ginning and builds on. Nothing is attempted without 
a definite and consummate purpose. A foundation is 
first laid, then the structure is erected thereon. The 
fact that we cannot see in the small and apparently in- 
significant beginning any design or purpose does not 
prove that future developments are the result of acci- 
dental environments. Nothing appears prematurely, 
nothing is tardy in its coming, nothing is attempted 
without ample and appropriate preparation. All is 
the result of infinite design by an infinite and perfect 
being. There is no other position that is tenable for an 
instant. 

This is not a cherished nor far-fetched theory, but 
conclusions based upon facts that we daily observe as 
the great panorama of nature passes before us. We 
see the great forest ; we see that it is fulfilling its pur- 



In the Beginning. 27 

pose and mission to perfection. We know that each 
great denizen of the forest sprung from a microscopic 
germ, if not still further back. We know that no acci- 
dental environments determine whether a given germ 
would develop into an oak, an elm, or a pine tree, or a 
weed. The kind and character of the tree was irre- 
vocable determined before the dormant germ began to 
grow. Conditions of light, heat, air, and soil might 
make possible a stinted and imperfect development, but 
it would still be an oak or an elm as the case might be, 
with all the peculiar characteristics pertaining thereto. 
We see old mother earth with her present monstrous 
proportions. We see her bosom split open and from the 
face of the upturned rocks we read a little of her his- 
tory. We see that she was formed by accretion. 
Grain of sand upon grain of sand, stratum upon stra- 
tum, slowly but surely the great design is working out, 
we see this process still going on. 

In view of all that we can learn we are irresistibly 
driven to the conclusion that this process is continuous 
back to the beginning, and the old earth also started 
from a spirit atom which had its origin in the creator, 
from which small beginning the earth has grown to its 
present proportions, by accretion, in fulfilment of a 
preconceived design. From the systematic manner in 
which we see all things develop we are justified in be- 
lieving that before the first two atoms were put 
together for a nucleus for this earth, that the earth in 
its completeness, and all things therein were designed. 
Otherwise there is accident and afterthought, which 
would be an evidence of imperfection. There was 



28 The Unknown Made Known. 

no evolution, in the ordinary acceptation of the 
term, about it. It is the fulfilment and completion of 
infinite design, no other hypothesis will bear analysis. 
In looking at the upturned face of the rocks we see 
other facts. We read the history of the living beings of 
the past. Poor dumb creatures though they were, they 
have written an indelible history for our instruction. 
We find fossils of animals and vegetables long since 
extinct; they have fulfilled the mission assigned to 
them by the Creator in the development of this earth ; 
they were no longer needed and they ceased to exist. 
Evolution cannot patch up a little here and a little 
there to adapt them to circumstances. Their fate is 
sealed, their purpose is accomplished, and they become 
a part of the past by an authority from which there is 
no appeal. Thus we follow creation down to the crea- 
tion of man, the crowning act of physical creation. In 
all the centuries of the history of man there has not 
been the slightest indication that evolution was prepar- 
ing a superior being to succeed man. In all the history 
of man he has never been able to enter the secret labo- 
ratory of evolution and behold the process, by self- 
acting cause, by which new orders of beings are 
brought into existence. It is all theory and nothing but 
theory. Creation did not retrograde but progressed, 
and that in a logical and systematic manner. This fact 
may help us to solve many difficulties. 

We will now go back to where we left matter, force, 
and law, in their simplest, incipient form. The 
bringing together of atom to atom indiscriminately into 
solid masses we call the attraction of cohesion. Now, 



In the Beginning. 29 

if the attraction of cohesion is inherent in, and an 
inseparable property of matter, why do not the atoms 
of matter in the gases and liquids instantly solidify and 
everything become solid? No man can answer that 
question only by saying, there is a law by the operation 
of which it is prevented. No chemist will tell us there 
is any difference between an atom of carbon in the 
gases, liquids, or solids. Law may act by the indirect 
means of the waves of heat and light, and they in turn 
are the result of force and law. The more we enter 
into the labyrinths of this intensely interesting subject, 
the more we can see the directing hand of a supreme 
intelligence. One other thought in reference to the 
attraction of cohesion being an inherent and insepara- 
ble property of matter. If this were true, whenever 
atoms of matter, or bodies of matter, came in reach of 
the attractive force they would be drawn together and 
become attached as one body. But this is not the case. 
A rod of iron may be cut in two, the ends leveled and 
polished, then forced together by hundreds of tons of 
force, till contact is complete and absolute ; remove the 
pressure and they will fall apart. The writer of this 
has seen a bolt taken from a sunken ship, that had been 
submerged seventeen years, that had been used to hold 
the machinery together, and where the nut had been 
drawn as tightly as possible in order to keep the ma- 
chinery in place, and when the nut was taken off by 
means of a wrench, the thread was found to be as clean 
and bright as when freshly cut. This close and con- 
stant contact had not caused the metal to adhere. The 
reason why it did not unite and become one solid piece 



30 The Unknown Made Known. 

of iron, can only be answered, to the satisfaction of the 
human intellect by saying there is a law that prevents it. 
The next step forward is by what we call chemical 
affinity, where certain atoms or bodies of matter attract 
certain other atoms or bodies of matter in preference to 
certain other atoms or bodies of matter. Here we dis- 
cover the beginning of organism and the classification 
of substances, preparing them for future use. This 
gives the different rocks, also the different metals, liq- 
uids and gases. ' Thus we see nature getting her house 
in order to be ready to accomplish the great work de- 
signed by the Creator. This is not the result of acci- 
dental environments, but the fulfilment of a perfect 
and infinite design. The next step brings us to 
elective affinity. By this force matter is taken into the 
sap of plants or the blood of animals, as the case may 
be, and carried to where it is needed, and deposited 
with unerring certainty. How this complicated proc- 
ess could be brought about by matter, acting by an 
inherent force undirected by a superior intelligence, is 
hard to understand. It would be about as easy to 
understand how iron ore in the mine, with its inherent 
force could transform itself into a bolt, then transport 
itself to a manufacturing establishment, and place itself 
in some machine just where it is most needed. Yet 
force acting under the direction of law superintended 
by intelligence will do that very thing. Let us observe 
how orderly nature has thus far progressed. First inert 
matter in its inert primitive atomic form, whatever that 
may be. Next the operation of simple force or attrac- 
tion by direction of simple law where atom is 



In the Beginning. 31 

attracted to atom. Next we have chemical affinity act- 
ing between the heterogeneous particles of bodies and 
forming compounds. Next we have elective affinity 
acting upon compounds forming organized bodies. If 
there is not plan and design in all this, certainly there is 
no such thing. 

Here we discover another important fact. Matter is 
never consumed. In all the varied accretions, forma- 
tions, and demolitions, there is nothing destroyed. It is 
merely a change of form. Here we have a glimpse of 
eternity that causes us to ask : Where is the line of de- 
markation between the eternal and the perishable ? 



CHAPTER III. 

THE DAWN OF LIFE. 

After matter, force and law have formed all the 
various inert substances in their infinite variety, from 
the firmest solid to the most attenuated gas or luminif- 
erous ether, nothing more can be done till a new 
element or principle is introduced. This we have in 
life. First in vegetable life in its simplest primitive 
form. In order to get something like a definite idea of 
what life is, we must get as near the beginning as possi- 
ble. Scientists have traced life, vegetable and animal, 
down to its existence, as they say, in the protoplasmic 
cell. Chemists tell us this protoplasm consists of car- 
bon, oxygen, nitrogen, and hydrogen, nearly identical 
with the white of an egg. Now if force or attraction is 
inherent in, and inseparable from matter, it is reason- 
able, by analogy, to assert that life is inherent in, and 
inseparable from, this cell of protoplasm. If that were 
true it would be possible, yes, reasonable, to believe that 
a chemist would be able, at least after repeated efforts, 
to produce a protoplasm that would contain life. He 
can produce an acid and an alkali that will effervesce, 
although his combination may not be perfect. But he 
cannot make a combination that will produce life, 
though it be ever so perfect. It seems plain that life is 
not inherent in the protoplasm, but that the protoplasm 
was formed for the purpose of planting life therein. 



The Dawn of Life. 33 

Again, this life cannot break the walls of the membra- 
nous cell within which it is imprisoned, this must be 
done by some extraneous force. When this is done, if 
the proper conditions prevail, and the proper material is 
present, growth will at once begin by the operation of 
force and law, under the supervision of this directing 
life ; and the animal or plant, as the case may be, will be 
formed, of which this particular life is the prototype. 

Let us try to go a little deeper and see if we cannot 
arrive at a more satisfactory conclusion as to what life 
really is. * Let us for convenience, take the oak tree, to 
use in our illustration, or analysis. Let us select a large 
tree, two or three feet in diameter, growing in compar- 
atively an open place, giving a wide spreading top. 
The season is propitious, and the loaded branches sway 
heavily in the wind because of their abundant fruitage. 
There are thousands and thousands of acorns, and in 
the centuries that have passed and in the years to come, 
other thousands and thousands of acorns have been and 
will be produced ; all of which can trace their origin to 
the parent acorn from which the tree sprung. Now let 
us examine the parent acorn. We find it composed of 
two general parts or elements. First, the body of the 
acorn which is simply a composition of matter, which 
does not differ from other aggregations of matter only 
in it's peculiar composition. Secondly, we find im- 
bedded in the acorn a protoplasmic cell, in which exists 
a peculiar, interesting, and invisible element, or exist- 
ence, that we call life. Let us examine this life care- 
fully and analytically. We find that it has the power or 
quality of transmitting life to other bodies of matter 



34 The Unknown Made Known. 

under certain and peculiar conditions, or of propagat- 
ing life. The acorn is not propagated, it is simply 
made by the action of the laws and forces of nature 
from existing matter. But the life of the acorn is not 
thus produced, it is propagated. Let us examine a little 
minutely how this wonderful operation is performed. 
This life is not a homogeneous existence, but a com- 
plete and perfect organism, and being in the nature of a 
spirit, it is extremely delicate, a sort of microcosm. We 
notice in the production of seed that there are two sepa- 
rate and opposed elements engaged. The pollen of the 
stamen must fertilize the pistil or no new life would be 
propagated, or seed be formed. Hence we are driven 
to the conclusion that life is an organized duality. This 
peculiar dual character is not so apparent in the forma- 
tion of the tree as in the propagation of life, yet it 
exists, and that fact argues that it is a necessity to 
enable life to perform its function. In the first instance 
the tree is made after a pattern, of which the organ- 
ized life is a prototype. There must be a standard of 
action somewhere, and from the very force of circum- 
stances we are compelled to seek it in the organized 
life. The tree is made after the image of the organized 
life from existing matter. The tree cut off from life 
has no power of reproduction. In the second instance 
the new life is a production of the old life in which its 
dual qualities are called into cooperate action in the re- 
production of itself, in which no existing matter is 
employed, and is a modified form of creation. Thus, 
life acting in its general character in its dual form is a 
symbol of the divine trinity. The life when cut off from 



The Dawn of Life. 35 

the tree has the power to make provision for its repro- 
duction, and hence is the principal agent, while the tree 
is the subsidiary one. Tracing back the acorn from 
progenitor to progenitor, we will come to the time 
when there was no parent acorn, for we know the time 
was, in the history of the earth, when there was no oak. 
The question now confronts us : how came the first oak 
life? Revelation tells us that "In the beginning God 
created the heavens and the earth." When the proper 
time arrived it is again stated: "And God said, let us 
make (create) man," not the physical man, but the 
spiritual man, the man life. In the foregoing passages, 
Hebrew scholars tell us that the word God is a trans- 
lation of the Hebrew Elohim, and is in the plural form. 
In the last passage quoted the relative us is used in the 
plural. From the fact that the trinity of the Godhead 
is clearly taught in the scriptures, it is not a far-fetched 
conclusion to say, that this thought was in the mind of 
the inspired penman when he wrote the above passages. 
If the above conclusions are correct, it is plain to see 
that we have the same conditions here that we have in 
the life of the acorn. And we can see that the same con- 
ditions exist in the creative power of the Godhead that 
exists in the reproductive power of the plant life. Now 
we can see where, how, and by whom the first oak life 
was ushered into existence. Not the oak tree, but the 
oak life, by which the oak tree was made, by the proc- 
esses of nature with which all are familiar. Notice 
another peculiar and interesting thought brought out in 
the scriptural narrative. After the man life had been 
created another important element or quality was added 



36 The Unknown Made Known. 

to man. "And God breathed into his nostrils the breath 
of life, and man became a living soul," not a living man, 
but a living soul. In this beautiful figurative expression 
we have an important fact very delicately expressed. 

Scientists also tell us that it is difficult, if not impos- 
sible, to distinguish between animal cells and vegetable 
cells. This certainly establishes one thing, that the be- 
ginning is far beyond the reach of the microscope. 

In tracing matter down through its various forma- 
tions, to the limits of the luminiferous ether, we found 
where it became so attenuated that spirit and matter 
could meet and work together, or in other words, to 
the spirit atom. In this protoplasm found in the micro- 
scopic cells, we have a peculiar and delicate formation 
of matter that is found nowhere in nature but in 
connection with life. Hence we are justified in con- 
cluding that this protoplasm is the bridge that connects 
spirit and matter in reference to life, both vegetable and 
animal. That this protoplasm is so delicate in its struc- 
ture that the Creator, who is a spirit, can communi- 
cate with it and plant within it life which is spirit, or 
from its nature, classed with spirit. This life is not the 
spontaneous creature of circumstances, or accidental 
conditions, but is an offshoot of the Creator and is 
simply ushered into existence when needed. It is of a 
higher order than force, and hence controls force, and, 
like force, it is spirit in its nature. It accords with the 
law that the superior succeeds the inferior. Further- 
more life has its peculiar character, which is its govern- 
ing element. There are two grand divisions of life in 
nature, vegetable life and animal life. Each is com- 



The Dawn of Life. 37 

posed of infinite variety. Each variety or species has 
its peculiar characteristics that accord with its controll- 
ing life and indicate its destiny. The plant grows by 
means of force, governed by law, acting upon matter, 
all under the control of its life. At this stage of devel- 
opment we find a new principle introduced, in both 
animal and vegetable growth, called by chemists, elec- 
tive affinity. This is a function of law. By this elective 
affinity, matter or material, is carried to and deposited 
where it is most needed in the constructive economy 
of the plant or animal. This is done by the direction of 
the life of the plant, or animal, which is a sort of super- 
vising architect. To get a better understanding of this 
plant growth and the function of life, let us draw a 
homely and commonplace illustration. Suppose it is 
desirable to construct a suspension bridge over a river. 
The services of a civil engineer are called in. He 
carefully constructs an ideal or imaginary bridge. He 
calculates the strength of the material to be used in the 
various parts of the bridge. The size and length of the 
various parts are carefully considered and assigned to 
their appropriate places. This ideal bridge in the form 
of plans and specifications is communicated to the 
workmen to guide them in the construction of the 
bridge. The gathering together of the material for the 
bridge, represents matter in the growing plant. The 
workmen constructing the bridge represent force. Their 
skill in knowing how to perform the work represents 
law. The instruction of the civil engineer to the work- 
men as to how the bridge is to be constructed, repre- 
sents the life of the plant, that superintends its growth. 



38 The Unknown Made Known. 

The civil engineer represents the Creator, who is the 
great designer of all things. 

Each plant, after its kind, fulfils its mission or pur- 
pose, under the direction and control of its particular 
life. It matters not whether it is an annual or a peren- 
nial; its mission must be fulfilled however short or 
however long the time required for its completion. 
Conditions of heat, soil, air, light, culture, and climate, 
may effect its growth and development, these conditions 
may give it a vigorous and perfect growth, whereby 
all its peculiar and latent characteristics may be fully 
developed, or, these conditions may give it a dwarfed 
and imperfect growth, whereby many of its prominent 
characteristics may be wholly or in part suppressed. 
But all these latent characteristics will reappear 
when environments are congenial. The plant is sta- 
tionary and can use only such material as is within 
its reach. It grows to its limited maturity, when its 
mission is fulfilled then it dies as an individual plant 
or tree. Why should it die? Why should it not con- 
tinue to grow and develop, or evolve, as long as con- 
ditions and environments are favorable, if life is an 
inherent property of it? It is hard to give an answer 
to that question. But when we say that the life of the 
plant is a distinct element from the plant, is a proto- 
type of the plant, and that when the prototype of the 
plant is materialized the growth of the plant ends, like 
the dimensions of the bridge end when the plan is 
complied with, we have a proposition that is clear and 
logical, something that we can grasp, not an unmean- 
ing generality. At the completion of the growth of 



The Dawn of Life. 39 

the plant, or, at stated periods, as the case may be, 
the plant life provides for its own perpetuation as 
heretofore described. Every tree bearing seed after 
its kind. 

It is in accordance with the observation of every one, 
that a nettle can reproduce nothing but a nettle, that 
an elm can reproduce nothing but an elm, that an oak 
can reproduce nothing but an oak. The fact that a 
tasteless unnutritious fruit can by cultivation, and 
climatic influences, be developed into a palatable and 
nutritious fruit does not disprove the proposition. This 
simply proves the wonderful latent possibilities of na- 
ture, and the points to the fiat: "In the sweat of thy 
face shalt thou eat bread." Thus man is told by infer- 
ence, of the wonderful possibilities in store for him if 
he will labor, cultivate, think. It would be madness to 
assert that electricity has been evolved during this cen- 
tury. We all know that electricity existed sixty cen- 
turies ago the same as now, that the solar spectrum 
would reveal the same secrets then as now, had man 
been sufficiently familiar with the laws of nature to 
know how to apply them. If the foregoing proposi- 
tions are true, and they certainly are, the doctrine of 
evolution falls to the ground, for that presupposes that 
an inferior principle or being can produce a superior 
principle or being, — that a fountain can raise above its 
head, a self-evident absurdity. It is very difficult for 
the mind of man to conceive of the existence of a spirit 
or of life as a separate entity, because the inclination is 
to associate them with space or volume, or definite lim- 
its, or a corporeal existence while they possess neither 



4o The Unknown Made Known. 

of these qualities. In our physical capacities we are as- 
sociated with matter, we perceive its bulk, its density, 
its resistance, all its various qualities, and it is hard for 
us to get out of this way of thinking of things and 
realize that spirit or life contains no such qualities. 
Yet we know that spirit and life exists with the pre- 
sumption that spirit largely predominates in the Uni- 
verse, if it is possible to make a comparison between 
things utterly unlike. Yet we have seen that under 
certain conditions matter and spirit meet, with the re- 
sult that spirit always controls matter; another great 
law in nature to be noted. 

After vegetable life the next step in nature is ani- 
mal life. Well-developed animals differ materially 
from vegetables in the fact that they have the power 
of locomotion. In passing from vegetable life to ani- 
mal life we find no well-defined line of demarkation. 
The lower forms of vegetable life and the lower forms 
of animal life are so nearly alike that they are a con- 
stant puzzle to the naturalist to distinguish the one 
from the other. Here, again, we have that irrevocable 
law, that one form imperceptibly passes into another 
without our being able to discover the dividing line. 
In other words, the Creator creates in the minute and 
not in the gross. As has been stated, the cell contain- 
ing the animal life germ is so nearly like the vegetable 
cell, that the microscope frequently fails to detect the 
difference. 

We find in the well-developed vegetable, that it is 
stationary, that it feeds upon the earth by means of 
its roots. These roots divide and subdivide until they 



The Dawn of Life. 41 

become almost microscopic. The ends of these fibrous 
roots under the microscope are almost, if not quite, 
transparent, and have the appearance of transparent 
jelly. By the effect of air, light, heat, and moisture, 
the soil is decomposed, and the little fibrous roots, by 
chemical and elective affinity, take up, first water to 
be used as a vehicle, then such elements as can be 
found, as the particular plant needs in its growth, and 
deposit these in the water or sap, by which means they 
are conveyed through the capillaries to their appropri- 
ate place, while the sap passes out through the leaves 
into the air. The sap flows, it does not circulate. This 
is the lowest and primitive form of digestion. In ani- 
mals we have a more complicated and delicate diges- 
tive structure. The developed animal cannot feed 
upon the crude earth. The vegetable must prepare 
food for the animal. The animal feeds upon the vege- 
table primarily. One animal may feed upon another 
animal, but the first animal feeds upon vegetables. 
Here we have a beautiful illustration of the construc- 
tive character of creation, a sort of harmonious succes- 
sion. The animal digests its food by a stomach. The 
food containing the necessary ingredients to sustain 
and nourish the animal is taken into the stomach. In 
this wonderful laboratory the food is dissolved, the 
required ingredients taken into the circulation, and 
the refuse cast off. The nourishment thus prepared 
is carried by the blood to its destination. The blood 
not only carries this nutriment to its appropriate place, 
but in its rounds takes worn out tissue and other im- 
purities, this is taken to the lungs, cast off, and the 



42 The Unknown Made Known. 

purified blood is now ready for a repetition of the same 
process. Here we have circulation, a new process in 
nature. We find that animal life is endowed with more 
extensive and elaborate powers than vegetable life. 
The capacity and character of the animal corresponds 
exactly with its life, under favorable conditions. Be- 
cause the animal is the product of the life principle, 
the animal stripped of its life is nothing but organized 
matter, without any power to act. 

If the proper food in quantity or quality cannot be 
supplied, the growth of the animal suffers. The life 
cannot compensate for this. The animal like the vege- 
table, by favorable conditions and environments, can 
be developed to its maximum possibilities, or, by ad- 
verse conditions, it can be reduced to a stunted dwarf, 
but it still retains its allotted place in nature, and no 
amount of culture or abuse, will change its original 
character. It will possess no qualities not originally 
possessed. Some qualities may be developed and 
some may be stunted, so as to appear to be a new 
creature, because different characteristics predominate. 
The philanthropist and the thief have the same organs 
of the brain, but differently developed. The philan- 
thropist has acquired no new organ, the thief has lost 
none. The philosopher has no organ that the savage 
does not possess. Culture develops but does not create. 
Neglect dwarfs and stunts, but does not obliterate. 
Thus we observe family traits manifesting themselves 
generation after generation. We see family traits that 
were once very prominent so subdued that their ap- 



The Dawn of Life. 43 

pearance is quite feeble. But they are there and by 
proper culture will assume supremacy. 

Thus we have rapidly traced life, vegetable and ani- 
mal, from the microscopic cell to its higher develop- 
ment in material nature. Hebrew scholars tell us, that 
every noun in the Hebrew language is derived from 
a radix, or root, from which not only the noun, but all 
the flexions of the verb, spring. This radix is the third 
person singular of the past tense. The ideal meaning 
of this root expresses some essential property of the 
thing which it designates, or of which it is an appella- 
tive. The root in Hebrew, and in its sister language 
the Arabic generally consists of three letters, and every 
word must be traced to its root in order to ascertain 
its genuine meaning. In like manner when we find 
a spiritual phenomenon that we do not understand, we 
carefully trace back to the beginning and seek an anal- 
ogous law, which we use as a base upon which to 
construct an explanation. We believe this is as proper 
and logical in one case as in the other. This keeps 
us within the bounds of law, by which we construct an 
explanation analogous to the constructive character 
of creation. 



CHAPTER IV. 

INSTINCT AND DAWN OF INTELLIGENCE. 

As we proceed with our investigations, we come 
to a new element or principle, called instinct. Now, 
what is instinct? We have seen vegetable life being 
gradually built up from the lowest one-celled plant 
to the massive forest. We see how imperceptibly na- 
ture glides from one form to another. The accretion 
is so gentle that we are puzzled to see where the change 
takes place. And we observe another thing, that the 
vegetable never gets to be anything but a vegetable. 
We also observe how animal life has progressed from 
its microscopic beginning. Not by evolution in its 
ordinary interpretation, but by accretion, by adding a 
higher form of life to a lower form, by imperceptible 
gradations. One great distinction between animals 
and vegetables is, that animals have mobility. An- 
other is the animal has the capacity to seek and select 
its food. This seems to be so very weak in the early 
forms of animal life as to be scarcely perceptible. But 
as creation proceeds this capacity becomes more and 
more pronounced, until it develops into instinct. In 
instinct the animal is prompted to a certain action with- 
out knowledge or apprehension of results. The thing 
is done in response to an impulse that is inspired from 
without, it is a part of the plan and design of the 
Creator. The animal requires certain food for its sus- 



Instinct and Dawn of Intelligence. 45 

tenance. Not being possessed of reason, it is power- 
less within itself to obtain it. A fostering and directing 
intelligence impels it to do what is necessary to pro- 
cure the requisite food. This fostering care comes 
from the Creator who fully and carefully provides for 
all His creatures. As we proceed upwards with our 
investigations in the animal kingdom we see this in- 
stinct slowly developing, and gradually merging into 
a semi-intelligence. As we see the development of 
instinct, we also see a corresponding physical develop- 
ment. There is an exact correspondence. In the physic- 
al development we see the development of the nervous 
system. The beginning of the nervous system corre- 
sponds to all the rest of creation, it begins far beyond 
the reach of the microscope, where matter and spirit 
meet. All admit that the nervous system is in some 
way a vehicle for thought, for action, for emotion, for 
all the spiritual manifestations peculiar to the animal 
economy. As we see the nervous system develop we 
see instinct and its successor, intelligence, correspond- 
ingly develop. Hence they must be inseparably con- 
nected. 

In some of the insects and lower animals we see an 
instinct of such a high order that we frequently mis- 
take it for intelligence. Among the insects which pos- 
sess a high order of instinct is the common ant. Its 
laying up food for winter seems to indicate fore- 
thought. Of the ant, Darwin says, "They build great 
edifices, keep them clean, close the door in the even- 
ing and place sentries? They make roads, as well as 
tunnels under rivers, and temporary bridges over them 



46 The Unknown Made Known. 

by clinging together. They collect food for the com- 
munity, and when an object too large for entrance is 
brought to the nest, they enlarge the door, and after- 
ward build it up again. They store up seeds, of which 
they prevent the germination, and which, if damp, are 
brought up to the surface to dry. They keep aphides 
and other insects for milch-cows. They go out to bat- 
tle in regular bands, and freely sacrifice their lives for 
the common weal. They emigrate according to a pre- 
concerted plan. They capture slaves. They move the 
eggs of their aphides, as well as their own eggs and 
cocoons, into warm par^ts of their nests, in order that 
they may be quickly hatched, and endless similar facts 
might be given." 

To this might be added the marvelous instincts of 
the honey bee. Naturalists tell us that honey bees are 
divided into three grades, queens, which are fully de- 
veloped females, workers, which are dwarf females, 
and drones which are the males. Without going into 
lengthy details it will be sufficient for the present pur- 
pose to state that bees construct three kinds of cells. 
Small ones where the workers are hatched and reared ; 
large ones where the drones are hatched and reared. 
The drone cells and worker cells in form are precisely 
alike, both being hexagonal. The queen cells, which are 
large and round, not hexagonal, and small at the 
top. If from any cause the queen bee is destroyed, 
if there are worker eggs in the comb, or worms not 
over three days old, the workers will make a queen 
cell out of three worker cells, destroying two eggs or 
worms, preserving the other egg or worm in the cell, 



Instinct and Dawn of Intelligence. 47 

feeding it upon the usual and peculiar queen food, 
and thus raise a new queen from a worker egg. To 
guard against accident they will raise two or three 
of them. They will feed and protect the drones in the 
forepart of the season, in the afterpart of the season 
they will destroy them, in order to rid themselves of 
a useless and expensive incumbrance during the winter. 
Here we have in the ant and in the honey bee an in- 
stinct that is simply wonderful. It is impossible for us 
not to believe, that there is reason and intelligence 
somewhere, that directs all these things. And yet is 
it any more wonderful, that the ant and the honey bee 
do these things, than that the plain homely plant can 
take from the soil the exact material and place it in 
exactly the right place to make the sweet smelling 
flower? Yet the ultimate cause of the one is the ulti- 
mate cause of the other. Each has its prescribed limits. 
"Thus far canst thou go and no further." 

The ant and bee can do just what is allotted to them 
to do. They cannot do more, they cannot do less. 
They have no choice in the matter. They simply do 
a thing without knowing why they do it. Naturalists 
tell us that in the ant and honey bee the cephalic gang- 
lia is enormously developed. This is unquestionably 
the nucleus of the cerebellum. As the cerebellum is 
the organ of action, we can see, by analogy, the cause 
of the great activity of the ant and bee. Or, in other 
words, the means by which this activity is manifested. 
This great activity without some governing intelli- 
gence would be a discordant monstrosity. The cere- 
bellum never thinks ; it simply acts. The ant and the bee, 



48 The Unknown Made Known. 

in all the history of man have made no improvement. 
There has been no evolution in their manner of work. 
The first honey bee cell that was ever constructed was 
perfect, because the instinct that directed its construc- 
tion acted by direction of a supreme intelligence, hence 
it is perfect, and perfection admits of no improvement. 
When man, who boasts of his superior reason, con- 
structs anything, it bears the imprint of his imperfec- 
tion. He commits blunders, he makes mistakes, he 
violates the laws of nature and of symmetry, the evi- 
dences of his imperfection are visible on every hand. 
One is human the other divine. We have in some of 
the lower animals a high order of instinct, that 
borders on intelligence and reason. There are some 
dogs that do some things that seem to be the result 
of reason. The same may be said of horses and other 
domestic animals. We also find in wild animals and 
birds many traits that seem to border on reason. We 
are liable to be led astray in observing these remark- 
able phenomena, from the fact, that we forget that 
nature glides from one form to another by impercep- 
tible gradations, though imperceptible to our imperfect 
comprehension, there is an absolute line of demarka- 
tion. We know that there is a radical and positive 
difference between spirit and matter, notwithstanding 
we cannot discover the dividing line. Upon close ex- 
amination we find an impassable barrier beyond which 
instinct cannot go. The shepherd dog seems frequent- 
ly to act with remarkable intelligence and sagacity, 
but undertake to train him as a setter and his utter 
want of reason is at once manifest. The beaver con- 



Instinct and Dawn of Intelligence. 49 

structs his dam and place of abode with remarkable 
precision and symmetry, exactly suited to his habits. 
But there his constructive capacity ends. The musk- 
rat constructs his house but he never builds a dam to 
impound the water about his house. Both are limited 
and directed by a fixed law of their life, beyond this 
law they cannot go. They never learn anything be- 
yond their alloted sphere. In all the centuries that 
horses have been housed in stables, or dogs in kennels, 
they have never learned to construct a habitation to 
protect them from the inclemency of the weather. The 
monkey, or ape family, seem to discover quite a high 
order of intelligence. They show great cunning and 
shrewdness in many ways. When they get old and 
their teeth get bad, they will crack their nuts with a 
stone and when done with it, they will hide it to keep 
some other monkey from getting it. They will use a 
club and throw stones in self defence, but never learn 
to throw a stone with precision. The orang in the east- 
ern islands, and the chimpanzee in Africa will construct 
a platform to sleep on, but they never put a shelter over 
it, or build a fire to warm themselves. With all their 
apparent intelligence they never fashion a flint into a 
tool or weapon. The monkey is circumscribed by the 
law of his life just as much as the oak. With all the 
training that man has given the monkey, the monkey is 
a monkey. And man has been unable by environ- 
ments or otherwise to evolve an animal with any 
greater capacity than the original monkey. Nothing 
short of supreme creative power can give the monkey 
any additional quality or faculty. 



50 The Unknown Made Known. 

Instinct cannot advance a single step towards a 
higher or more perfect action, without a corresponding 
development of the nervous system, and this cannot 
be without first a spirit life with enlarged capacity, 
to cause this additional development to be. Neither 
can instinct add one jot or tittle to itself, that is superi- 
or to its present self. Such a proposition is a glaring 
absurdity. Such a creation must come from a source 
that has the power to create. That the creator must be 
superior to the creature is a self-evident fact. 

As we proceed upward through the animal king- 
dom, we see the nervous system approaching more 
and more nearly to perfection. From the lancelet, 
where the vertebral column, in the form of a streak 
of gristle, first makes its appearance, and the rudi- 
ments of a spinal cord is first seen, and a rudimentary 
brain is first discernible, we pass on to a well-formed 
spinal column, imbedded in which is a well-formed 
spinal cord, surmounted by a brain. We notice that 
the cerebellum is first developed. As this is the organ 
of action it precedes the cerebrum, which is the organ 
of intelligence and reason. The cerebellum is the mo- 
tive power of the animal. The cerebellum never thinks 
but acts. Any animal with a proportionately large 
cerebellum has powerful action. As action is first re- 
quired this organ is first created. Where there is the 
faculty of instinct to direct all the simple movements 
that are required, and to direct the performance of all 
things necessary for the existence of the animal, no 
thought is necessary. The plant grows and develops 
by direction of its plant life. It has no need of in- 



Instinct and Dawn of Intelligence. 5 1 

stinctive direction, hence no organ nor nervous system 
is prepared for it. It possesses all the qualities that 
its plant life requires. It could have nothing less nor 
nothing more than what it has, because the plant is the 
reflex of its life. But when we get to the animal king- 
dom there is a "higher form of life present. That high- 
er form of life must have means to act ; hence the nerv- 
ous system. As creation proceeds we know that the 
spirit life is being enlarged in its functions and capacity, 
by the results produced. We see the nervous system 
being perfected. When the base and posterior portion 
of the cerebrum begin to appear or form we see a high- 
er order of instinct begin to make itself manifest. We 
see the organs of passion and desire becoming active. 
There is no thought nor reason about this, it is simply 
an unreasoning impulse demanding gratification. 
These passions and desires could never be gratified, 
had not an organ been provided capable of action. 
But this provision was made in the cerebellum which 
acts when called on by a superior organ. As the base 
and posterior of the brain develops, the capacity and 
importance of the animal increases. In order that we 
may get a clear conception of the progress of creation, 
we must bear this in mind; that any development in 
the physical organism is preceded and caused by en- 
larged powers of the spirit life, and not vice versa. 
As we trace the development of nature from the micro- 
scopic monad to man, we see how systematically and 
orderly the Creator has performed his work. 



CHAPTER V. 

THE DAWN OF REASON. 

In former chapters we have attempted to hurriedly 
trace life from its primitive appearance to the higher 
types of quadrupeds and quadrumana, from its faintest 
appearance as a controlling and directing power to a 
type of instinct that seems to border on intelligence 
and reason. In all this it was plain to be seen that it 
was the life of the particular individual or kind that 
was the thing created; that the physical or material 
individual was simply made; that the individual per- 
sonality was the result of the power that life had to 
control and direct law and force in their operations 
over matter ; that the material individual could not pos- 
sibly exceed in vigor or capacity the spirit life that 
caused it to be. Whenever the spirit life became en- 
larged in function or capacity, the material individual 
was correspondingly enlarged. This again brings us in 
contact with the question of propagation. We have 
seen plainly that plant life has the power of propaga- 
tion, after which the parent plant life dies. If from 
cultivation or from other favorable conditions any quali- 
ty or peculiarity is modified or improved, that modi- 
fication is transmitted to the offspring. No new peculi- 
arities are produced by propagation. Many vegetable 
forms so change in different climates that they appear 
to be a new creation. Thus the Virginia cherry tree 



The Dawn of Reason. 53 

attains a height of a hundred feet in the southern 
states, but it is dwarfed to a shrub of not more than 
five feet at the Great Slave Lake. The nasturtium, 
which is a woody shrub in warm climates is a succulent 
annual in cold. This simply proves quite conclusively 
the effect of climate upon vegetable life and growth. 
The cherry is a cherry still, the nasturtium is a nas- 
turtium still; although many of their qualities have 
been so dwarfed that they are very obscure, their or- 
ganism is precisely the same. The same laws apply to 
animals as to vegetables, especially as to propagation. 
In most vegetables the dual life is embodied in one 
plant or tree, as the case may be. But in animals, es- 
pecially of the higher grades, there is a separate person- 
ality for each sex. Here we see the wisdom and neces- 
sity of an all-wise Creator. Plants, not having the 
power of locomotion, would frequently be barren if they 
did not possess a dual life. True, some plants, and 
many flowers, are male and female, as we say. But in 
such cases the pollen is carried to the opposite flower 
by the wind or by insects in search of honey. We here 
notice an infallible law of propagation, that the off- 
spring inherits the peculiarities of the parent. As the 
spirit life is the motive cause that produces the body, it 
is plain that it is the spirit life alone that is prop- 
agated. Hence the transmission of characteristic 
traits is an imperative necessity or result, be- 
cause it would be an impossibility for a parent 
to transmit that which it did not possess, for there 
is no conceivable way for an individuality to become 
possessed of any trait of character but by inheritance. 



54 The Unknown Made Known. 

Possession must precede conveyance. Characteristic 
traits may be dormant, or they may be active, but the 
germ is there ready to develop or grow when the con- 
ditions are favorable. In the protoplasmic life cell of 
man was placed a life that possessed the possibilities 
of. thought and reason. By the power that this spirit 
life exercised over law, force and matter a body was 
formed exactly suited to its occupancy. Cities are built 
for the occupancy of the people, — the people are not 
created to fill the cities. 

When the Creator endowed man with reason, he 
put him in control of the forces of nature. He was 
thus endowed with the capacity of self improvement. 
He could cultivate and improve the organs of the brain 
to an almost unlimited extent. He also had the power, 
to a limited extent, of transmitting these improved con- 
ditions to his offspring. Hence man's advancement 
from barbarism to civilization. But in all this improve- 
ment there are no new organs acquired, simply the 
cultivation or development of latent qualities already 
existing in a suppressed or subdued state. That is, man 
was not made a cultivated, civilized creature. The be- 
ginning of every human being that ever breathed upon 
the face of the earth, was in the microscopic germ, from 
that he grew, by accretion, to whatever estate he may 
have arrived. His intellectuality grew, just like his 
body, by accretion. Who ever knew a child that could 
read at birth? The child gains knowledge by slow 
and laborious accretion. 

There is perhaps as much difference between the 
most depraved Bosjesman, of South Africa, and the 



The Dawn of Reason. 55 

most cultured philosopher, as between the dwarf cherry 
tree of Great Slave Lake and the giant cherry tree 
of Virginia. Yet the savage has every organ of the 
mind that the philosopher has, one is dwarfed; the 
other is cultivated. 

In man we have the crowning act of physical crea- 
tion. Man was created to stand alone. He is endowed 
with the power of choice. He can improve or he can 
retrograde. He can work or he can lay idle. The 
lower animals are impelled to do what they do. They 
have no choice in the matter whatever. The ant and 
the honey bee labor by direction of an instinct that is 
their task-master, and that task-master directs them in 
all the details of their work and there is absolutely no 
escape for them. Their obedience to that instinct is an 
unreasoning obedience. Perhaps there is no better ex- 
ample of unreasoning obedience to an intelligent in- 
stinct than in the honey bee. It is generally known 
that in honey comb there are two sizes of cells. The 
larger size are drone cells, all the bees raised in these 
cells are males or drones; all the bees raised in the 
small cells are dwarf females or workers. Both these 
kind of cells have parallel walls, and are consequently 
the same size throughout their entire length. There is 
also a special cell or cells constructed differently from 
either the drone or worker cells. These cells are round, 
not hexagonal like the others, but small at the bottom, 
larger in the center, and small at the top. These are 
the cells in which the queen or mother of the colony is 
raised. It is known that the eggs that produce drones 
are not fertilized or impregnated. That the eggs that 



56 The Unknown Made Known. 

are fertilized produce workers or queens according to 
the size of the cell and the peculiar food given the 
growing bee. Now comes the first question : How 
does the queen know that she is laying an unfertilized 
egg in a drone cell, and a fertilized egg in a worker or 
queen cell ? It is safe to say that it took centuries for 
naturalists to find out all about this. Within the body 
of the queen are two ovaries or egg bags, they have 
ducts that connect, forming the oviduct, through which 
the eggs pass out. On the side of this oviduct is a small 
globular sack containing the impregnating semen, this 
connects by a small duct with the oviduct. Now when 
the queen places the lower part of her body in a drone 
cell, it is just large enough to not compress her body, 
hence no impregnating semen is forced from the little 
sack or "spermatheca" and the egg is not impregnated. 
But when she introduces her body into a queen or 
worker cell, she has to force it in, and thus the semi- 
nal sack is compressed and the egg is fertilized. The 
fact is, the queen knew nothing about whether she was 
laying a fertilized or an unfertilized egg. It was a 
mechanical operation of which she knew nothing. She 
was impelled by instinct, of which she knew nothing, 
and over which she had no control, to do certain things 
that would produce certain results. The next question 
is : How do the workers know that they must build 
large cells for the drones, and small cells for the work- 
ers, and small-mouthed cells for the queen ? And again, 
why do they build round cells for the queen instead of 
hexagonal, as they do for the drones and workers? 
Certainly no rational man will say that the bees held 



The Dawn of Reason. 57 

a council and said: "We don't have to join this cell 
to another, hence the walls of this cell don't make walls 
to other apartments, we will build it round as that is 
the most economical of material." The only answer to 
all these questions is, that the bee is directed and im- 
pelled to do just what it does, by a supremely intelligent 
instinct of which it knows nothing. For the purpose of 
storing honey worker cells are constructed, because 
they correspond to the size of their bodies, they fre- 
quently elongate them so as to hold more honey and 
for which purpose they frequently elongate them, but 
for breeding purposes they construct cells of uniform 
depth. In all nature it is "hard to find an example of 
the workings of instinct, and one that is more interest- 
ing to work out than in the honey bee. Similar state- 
ments might be made about the ant in many of its 
wonderful and mysterious workings. So that it is 
no wonder that the psalmist cried out : "Go to the ant, 
thou sluggard, and be wise." 

Not so with man, he is given reason, he is a free 
moral agent. Placed before him is the irrevocable 
law : "By the sweat of thy face shalt thou eat bread." 
If he sees fit to labor diligently he will receive an 
abundant reward. If he chooses to lay idle and sink 
down into "innocuous desuetude," he must accept his 
fate as the work of his own hands. 

We have in man a creature with an enlarged capaci- 
ty and added organs and greater possibilities. We find 
that this new creature has an enlarged brain with a 
wonderfully delicate structure. Not only is the cerebel- 
lum well and fully developed, but the cerebrum has ad- 



58 The Unknown Made Known. 

ditional organs and is much enlarged. We also notice 
that the convolutions in the cerebrum are much deeper 
and more numerous than in the higher type of the low- 
er animals. The cerebellum is not convoluted but stri- 
ated. The cerebrum thinks, reasons, plans and designs, 
has emotions, desires and passions, but does not act. 
The cerebellum does not think, or reason, it simply acts, 
it obeys the behests of the cerebrum, whose servant it is. 
The wisdom of this arrangement is apparent; if there 
were two thinking organs there would be irreconcilable 
conflict, a condition not found in nature. Nature never 
makes duplicates for the same purpose. Anatomists 
tell us that in the cerebrum of persons who are noted 
thinkers, and do a great deal of mental work, the con- 
volutions are deeper and more numerous than in the 
cerebrum of those who are mentally indolent. Hence 
we conclude there is, in some way, a close association 
between the convolutions and mental operations. It 
has also been observed that the texture of the brain 
indicates the degree of mental activity. We are taught 
that persons who have small, coarse brains are mentally 
dull. That persons who have large, finely textured 
brains, are mentally bright. We also discover that 
persons with a small encephalon have little mental re- 
sistance, and easily yield to a stronger mental organiza- 
tion, whether it be good or bad. We also discover that 
persons with a large cerebellum have great resistance, 
and are harder to convince than persons with a smaller 
one. These are general principles which have endless 
variations. We see these conditions grow and develop 
in the child and are not mistaken. All these various 



The Dawn of Reason. 59 

physical conditions affect the man. If the encephalon 
is large, well developed, and of fine texture, the reason- 
ing will be powerful and exhaustive. But if small and 
of inferior texture the reasoning will be feeble and un- 
certain. Just as where the muscles are large and firm 
there is great strength, and where the muscles are 
small and soft there is weakness. Life, law, and force 
must have something to act on or they cannot act. 

Machiavelli, the great Italian philosopher and states- 
man, said, that mankind, by nature, were divided into 
three orders. The first and superior order, but limited 
in number, are those who by the power of their intel- 
lect, comprehend and understand things. The second, 
or intermediate order, but more numerous, are those 
who understand things when they are explained to 
them. They have their teacher or newspaper or books 
that they listen to or read, and then unconsciously re- 
tail the opinions or beliefs thus formed as their own. 
The third or lower order, and the most numerous, are 
those who really never understand at all. They think 
in monosyllables. They take their opinions, if opinions 
they have, from some person, newspaper or book, that 
happens to suit their fancy, and that is what they be- 
lieve, and that is the end of it. Persons of the first 
order have no additional faculties of the brain not pos- 
sessed by persons of the lowest order. They simply 
have been developed by use and application. "In the 
sweat of thy face shalt thou eat bread." We have now 
come to the highest order of physical or material life. 
It is impossible for man to conceive of another faculty 
or organ of the brain that would add anything to his 



60 The Unknown Made Known. 

mental capacity. Animal life has now reached the goal 
that it started for when it left the microscope monad. 
All under the control and direction of an all-wise Crea- 
tor. In all this systematic development, we see the 
outlines of a plan and design that challenges our ad- 
miration. It may be asked here, if the lower animals 
cannot reason — have . no intelligence in the stricter 
sense — why have they a cerebrum? And why have 
they even faint convolutions? In one sense of the 
word they do think and reason. If the beaver did not 
have the organ of construction, instinct would have no 
means by which to impel him to build a dam. Instinct 
operating on or through the organ of construction, is 
a sort of reasoning by proxy. If he did not have the 
organ of secretiveness, instinct would have no means 
to incite him to hide his nest in order to protect his 
young. If he did not have a muscle, instinct would 
have no means by which to cause him to carry mud 
for his dam. In the construction of his dam, he uses 
sticks and mud intermixed for two purposes, to im- 
pede the wash and to strengthen the dam. The beaver 
does not reason this out in the higher sense of the word, 
as a civil engineer would, but does it by direction of 
instinct, by a sort of mechanical reasoning, of which 
the beaver is unconscious. In the case of man, reason 
directs his operations, and he is conscious of the power 
that impels him. He weighs the pros and cons, he 
avails himself of one force, and prepares to resist an- 
other. This power of reason dwells within him, it is 
a part of his spirit life. Man possesses the directing 
power, the beaver does not. 



CHAPTER VI. 

THE SOUL OR SPIRIT OF MAN. 

When the writer of this was in the army, he had the 
yellow fever in the summer of 1864, at Morganzie's 
Bend, Louisiana. As the fever advanced, unconscious 
spells began to appear. As these spells would come on, 
there was the sensation of sinking down into darkness, 
with a peculiar destitute sensation, but still possessing 
the consciousness of existence. Then as consciousness 
would return there was the sensation of coming up into 
light and activity, and finally a sinking down into this 
peculiar unconscious conscious condition for an indefi- 
nite period. With recovery came the sensation of again 
coming up into light. These sensations started the in- 
quiry : What is it that thus seems to have an identity 
separate and apart from ordinary life ? What is it that 
is thus conscious of being in connection with the or- 
gans of the brain, and with mental operations, and then 
is conscious of being separated therefrom ? There was 
also the sensation of an effort to regain possession of 
the brain, or to get up into light. There was the sensa- 
tion of absolute helplessness to emerge from darkness 
into light. This change was in every case involuntary. 
This awakened the inquiry : What was this something 
that was having all this trouble? Again, the writer 
was stricken with paralysis, Oct. 7th, 1871, in Porter 
County, Indiana. My entire left side was without 



62 The Unknown Made Known. 

feeling or motion, my left eye was nearly blind, my left 
ear was nearly deaf. The left lobe of my brain was 
paralyzed. I will say here that I understand what an- 
atomists say about the optic nerve crossing, and that 
even the right lobe of the brain is connected with the 
left side and all that sort of thing. I am simply speak- 
ing of sensations as I experienced them. My left side 
was so completely paralyzed that I could not realize 
that it was there. I frequently put my right hand over 
to see if it were there. My right eye and ear were af- 
fected, seeing and hearing were imperfect. The right 
lobe of my brain was so affected that I realized its weak 
and imperfect working. In this condition I had the 
clear and unmistakable sensation of trying to get to 
the left lobe of my brain and get assistance. This I 
could not do, every avenue of entrance seemed securely 
closed. One side of my brain was working imperfectly, 
the other side I could not get to nor arouse. After 
recovery when the organs resumed their normal con- 
dition and readily responded to calls, the question came 
up: What was this individuality that was having so 
much trouble? In all these cases, what was this that 
was dwelling within me that seemed to have a separate 
individuality from my physical being? Under certain 
conditions it seemed to be an absolute monarch, under 
other conditions it seemed to be a helpless dependent. 
In a state of health it assumes absolute sway and can 
so direct and control every movement and thought of 
man, that the physical man is only an instrument, a 
convenience. 

Again, suppose I look out into the street and see 



The Soul or Spirit of Man. 63 

a horse. There are at least four things about that horse 
that may attract my attention. First, his color ; second, 
his size; third, his form; fourth, his weight. Now if 
the organs of color, form, size and weight would begin 
to discuss the qualities of the horse peculiar to its 
function there would be unutterable confusion in my 
brain. But there is a something present in my brain 
that acts as a monitor and says to the organ of color : 
"You investigate the color of this horse. I want to 
know all about it. I want to know if this horse has a 
handsome color, or a harsh color. I want to know all 
you can find out about it, and the rest of you organs 
keep still till I call you up." When the organ of color 
completes its investigation, this monitor says : "All 
right, you have performed your allotted work, now keep 
quiet and I will call up the organ of size." Thus each 
organ in its turn is called up and required to perform 
its functional duty. This is not a speculative theory, 
it is a fact that is verified by the experience of every 
one. It would seem that these experiences, many of 
which come within the observation of all, when they 
come to think about it, establish beyond the possibility 
of cavil that there is something dwelling in every man 
that is separate from his physical being. There certain- 
ly is no rational man that will deny that he has a con- 
scious existence of some kind. We have the faculty of 
vision, there is no way to prove its existence but by 
appealing to every one's knowledge of its existence. 
Apparent facts are the foundation upon which we must 
base every logical analysis. We know that we exist, 
we can't form a syllogism and prove it. It is simply 



64 The Unknown Made Known. 

a fact. We know there is such a thing or existence 
as life. We know there is such a thing or existence 
as spirit. It is a fact, not a proposition. All we can 
do — all there is to do — is to familiarize ourselves with 
the various laws governing life and spirit in the per- 
formance of their multiform functions. With all these 
experiences and facts before us, we are driven to the 
conclusion that man has a soul or spirit that is over 
and above his physical existence, and while associated 
with his physical being is yet an entirely separate entity. 
We readily see that the mental operation we call think 
is the physical function of the brain, and is under the 
control and direction of this separate and higher power 
that we call the soul or spirit of man. Every one is 
conscious of the fact that he can in some way control 
his thoughts. And the more this prerogative is exer- 
cised the easier it is to enforce. It is true that the 
clamorous call of passion and desire for gratification 
is sometimes hard to suppress, but it can be done, and 
the more the propensities are disciplined the easier they 
are to control. And likewise, the more the moral and 
intellectual organs are called into action the stronger 
they get, and they become more and more predomi- 
nating in the mental parliament. 

All know that the more we think about a given sub- 
ject, the easier and more agreeable it is to think about 
it. So that what was at one time irksome and disagree- 
able becomes pleasing and even a pastime. A person 
who has a taste for music finds that the more he exer- 
cises that organ, the more pleasing it is to do so. So it 
is with all the other organs. So it is with the muscles, 



The Soul or Spirit of Man. 65 

they are likewise subject to discipline, what at first is 
difficult and hard to do by practice becomes easy and 
agreeable. Both are physical operations, the difference 
is, one is a primary action, the other a secondary action. 
In the first case the soul acts primarily upon the brain, 
in the second case the soul cannot act upon the mus- 
cles directly, but acts upon the muscles through the 
brain, making a secondary action. 

Another peculiarity of the brain comes from the fact 
that there are two lobes, and consequently two sets of 
organs. Whenever a pair of organs act together the 
effect is more pronounced than when they act singly. 
Thus it both organs of calculation are exercised at the 
same time, and their united effort is concentrated upon 
one proposition the result is much more forceful than 
if only one organ acted alone. This brings out the 
thought that size gives strength. If two organs give 
greater strength than one organ, it must be because 
of their aggregate size. Hence we see that persons 
who have certain organs largely developed and culti- 
vated, have large capacity in that particular direction. 
Hence we see the necessity of cultivating and exercis- 
ing the organs of the brain in order to enlarge their 
size and increase their capacity and activity. To do 
this is the function of the soul, and for this it is held 
responsible. The power to do a thing carries with 
it the responsibility of doing it well. Heace the soul 
that fails to do the very best it can with the materials 
placed at its disposal, misses the mark, or commits 
a sin, for which it must answer. 

There is another peculiarity of the brain and its func- 



66 The Unknown Made Known. 

tions. That is the power of thinking of two different 
things or subjects at the same time. This thought 
came to the writer after the experiences in paralysis. 
This thought came: If one half of the brain can act 
alone, is it not possible for each half to act separately 
and independently? A little investigation discovered 
that this is a very common occurrence. An experienced 
detective will carry on a conversation with one person, 
and read a telegram passing through a station, at the 
same time. Here we have one lobe of the brain direct- 
ing a conversation, and the other reading a telegram. 
It is the experience of all, that they frequently catch 
themselves thinking of two things at the same time. 
They will be doing something or making something 
that requires their attention, but not intense thought, 
at the same time they will be lightly thinking about 
something else. But as soon as it is necessary to give 
the whole attention to some particular thing or subject 
all stray thoughts are instantly suppressed, so that the 
ful power of the mind can be utilized. This power 
of concentration is increased by habit. A person who 
is a deep, close thinker can concentrate his mind upon 
the solution of some problem or the investigation of 
some subject so intently that other parties in the 
room may tell all their secrets and he know nothing 
about it. Such a person is an exhaustive thinker and 
generally makes thorough work of his intellectual pur- 
suits. Whilst he who thinks so lightly that he is easily 
disturbed, or knows all that is going on around him, 
never does thorough work, he never gets below the sur- 
face. His brain is not disciplined. He has not the 
power to harness his entire intellectual capacity to one 



The Soul or Spirit of Man. 67 

subject and make an undivided supreme effort. Hence 
he falls short. 

The writer has at different times been called on to 
make an extempore speech at a picnic. With one side 
of my brain I would talk about some frivolous matter 
to entertain the people for a few minutes, while with 
the other side I would construct the rough outlines of 
a little speech. This is not simply a pleasing theory, it 
is an actual experience, that can be corroborated by 
many. There must be a controlling power somewhere 
that can incite one organ or set of organs into action 
and suppress the others into absolute quiet. There 
seems to be no way of accounting for this, only by at- 
tributing this control, this supremacy, to the soul. If 
there were not some such monitor and all the organs of 
the brain were left to voluntary action, the human cra- 
nium would be a veritable bedlam and pandemonium. 
No order, system, nor concentration would be possible, 
nothing but inextricable confusion. And of course 
nothing could be accomplished. Supervision must pre- 
cede construction. Here again we see the marvelous 
wisdom of a Supreme Being. This is not evolution. 
This is not the result of accidental circumstances or en- 
vironments, but a systematic building up from the be- 
ginning, with a definite object and purpose in view. 
There is no break in the line, it is consistent. 

Another thought in connection with the yellow fever 
and paralysis experiences. What is the cause of the 
brain's refusal to respond to the mandate of the soul? 
The brain was still alive; it still retained its texture; 
blood still flowed through its veins and arteries; life 



68 The Unknown Made Known. 

was still there, yet no action could be aroused. The 
answer is this : thought, as far as the brain is concerned 
is a physical operation. In this case the physical energy 
of the brain became so weakened by the wasting effects 
of disease, and not receiving the necessary nourishment 
to supply the wastage, that it was physically unable to 
respond. Just as I was unable to stand, because my 
muscles were so wasted away, or consumed, that there 
was not sufficient muscle to act on to produce what 
we call strength. In the case of the yellow fever the 
wasting away was gradual, and I became prostrate, 
mentally and muscularly, both from the same cause. 
In the case of paralysis the prostration came more sud- 
denly, but not instantaneous. When my physician 
called to see me, he said that my liver was dormant, and 
my digestion was abnormal, and that I had a low fever. 
He said he would correct the irregularities of my liver 
and digestion — reduce the fever, and let the paralysis 
take care of itself, which treatment proved effectual. 
I had been decidedly unwell for several days, and had 
been making quite an effort to brace up against adverse 
feelings. My vitality had been gradually encroached 
upon to the limit, and the crash came suddenly, the 
requisite material for the soul to act on was not there 
hence there was no response.. In the case of the yellow 
fever, during these moments of unconsciousness, the 
brain would get a little rest, would gather a little 
energy, and would then be able to act a short time, until 
this accumulated energy was expended, then another 
season of rest and recuperation. 

From the same reason or cause the child cannot 



The Soul or Spirit of Man. 69 

reason until it reaches a state of maturity by wnich 
its brain will have sufficient energy to act, for its soul 
cannot direct action until there is a physical condition 
that makes it possible. The question now confronts 
us : Whence the soul ? When we attempt to construct 
a course of reasoning, and make a collation of acts by 
which we can arrive at a logical conclusion that the 
soul in some mysterious way was evolved from exist- 
ing conditions, we at once get into difficulty in finding 
a starting point. Organized matter did not evolve the 
spirit life, for the simple reason that the spirit life pre- 
ceded organized matter and caused it to form. When 
the Creator desired to have a physical body of enlarged 
capacities, he did not create or form the body and then 
create a spirit life to correspond. But he created a 
spirit life of enlarged capacities, and the spirit life by 
natural processes caused the body to grow to the exact 
proportions to suit the purpose. This makes a reason- 
able and analogous explanation of the phenomenon of 
the progress of animal development. It may be that 
objection will be made to this statement, because of its 
apparent conflict with the account of the creation of 
man in the second chapter of Genesis, where it stated : 
"And the Lord God formed man out of the dust of the 
ground, and breathed into his nostrils the breath of 
life, and man became a living soul." Many think that 
this passage establishes beyond doubt that the physical 
man was first formed in all his physical perfection 
and lay there cold and lifeless, until "God breathed 
into his nostrils the breath of life." Then instantly 
the heart began to throb, and the lungs to heave. The 



jo The Unknown Made Known. 

blood circulated, the cheek flushed, the eye brightened 
with sight, and man became a living soul. Before we 
hastily come to a conclusion let us make an analysis of 
creation as described in the book of Genesis. Josephus 
in the preface to his great work, in reference to Moses, 
says: "While our legislator speaks some things but 
enigmatically, and others under a decent allegory, but 
still explains some things, as required a direct explana- 
tion, plainly and expressly." This statement is fully 
sustained by the scriptures themselves. The first chap- 
ter of Genesis gives a plain and distinct account of the 
order of creation in such plain and direct manner that 
anybody can understand it. That the statement is true, 
not only in detail, but in chronological order, is verified 
by the indelible history of the rocks. That this state- 
ment was inspired is evidenced by the fact, that at the 
time it was written, geology as a science was unknown ; 
and therefore the account could not have been written, 
by man alone, to conform to the concealed history 
within the bosom of the earth. In the first chapter we 
have the plain concise statement : "And God created 
man in his own image, in the image of God created he 
him, male and female created he them." All agree that 
God is a spirit and does not have form and parts like a 
temporal man. Here is another instance where the 
inspired penman wrote more wisely than he conceived. 
The only way that man can be like God is in his 
spirit. That was created after the image of God ; that 
is it had like attributes. The body of man was not 
created as a body, it was formed of "the dust of 
the ground." That is, of existing matter. Man con- 



The Soul or Spirit of Man. 71 

structs a house to live in that suits his habits and man- 
ner of living. The bird constructs its nest to suit its 
habits and purpose. The spirit or soul of man by the 
aid of law, force, and matter, forms a body to live in 
that exactly suits its character and purpose. The spirit 
life of the bird does the same thing. Back of all this is, 
"In the beginning, God." The spiritual man was in 
the likeness of God as to the nature of his attributes. 
His temporary body was of secondary consideration. 
According to the account in the first chapter, man is 
the crowning act of creation. This statement accords 
with geological history, and is indisputably true. If we 
attempt to construe the second and third chapters as 
we have the first, literally, we will get into inextricable 
difficulties. Let us take the order of creation as stated 
in the second chapter, and see how our troubles begin 
to accumulate. Beginning with the 7th verse, we have 
that statement that God made man. In the 8th verse, 
the narration is continued by saying: "And the Lord 
God planted a garden eastward in Eden, and there put 
the man whom he had formed." The 9th verse con- 
tinues the narrative by saying : "And out of the ground 
made the Lord God to grow every tree that is pleasant 
to the sight, and good for food, the tree of life in the 
midst of the garden, and the tree of knowledge of 
good and evil." A literal construction of this passage 
would make it appear that man was not the climax of 
creation. But that the garden of Eden was laid out 
and all the beautiful and fruit-bearing shrubs and 
trees were planted and caused to grow after Adam was 
created. In the 10th verse the narrative continues : 



72 The Unknown Made Known. 

''And a river went out of Eden to water the garden, 
and from thence it parted and became four heads." 
Then follows a description of the rivers, which has 
been an effectual stumbling block to the commentators 
who attempt to construe this chapter literally. No 
such place as described can be found. In the 15th 
verse the narrative continues : "And the Lord God took 
the man and put him in the garden to dress and to keep 
it." God then gave Adam certain instructions and 
commandments. In the 18th verse God said: "It is 
not good that man should live alone, I will make him a 
helpmeet for him." Now follows the statement of the 
creation of the beasts of the field and the fowls of the 
air, and the bringing of them to Adam to name them. 
This being done, we are told how woman, who was 
to be the companion of man, was created or made. 
The narrative continues through the third chapter, de- 
scribing the disobedience of man and its dire conse- 
quences. It is utterly impossible to reconcile the two 
statements, as to the order of creation, as contained in 
the first and second chapters, if we attempt to construe 
them literally. That the first chapter is literally true 
as to the order of creation there is no question. The 
evidences are overwhelming and abundant. Hence 
w r e must dispose of the second and third chapters other- 
wise than literally. Take the hint from Josephus and 
construe them as a beautiful allegory, so common in 
Jewish literature, and we have a new field open to our 
vision. Man's original purity, his disobedience and 
fall, the whole plan of redemption and salvation, is 
prophetically revealed in a beautiful figure of speech, 



The Soul or Spirit of Man. 73 

that makes the second and third chapters sparkle with 
gems of revelation. It seems to be the purpose of the 
second and third chapters to reveal certain great truths 
without any reference to chronological order. As this 
book is not a dissertation on theology, the above an- 
alysis will be pursued no further. 

After the above digression we will now return to the 
question before us. Whence the soul? The spirit- 
life could not produce it because its functions were lim- 
ited. It sometimes fails to perform its functions and 
produces a monstrosity. But there is no case where 
it has produced an organ or a capacity that it did not 
possess. As we attempt to find a lodgment for our ar- 
gument we are irresistibly driven to the old aphorism : 
'There is no effect without a cause." The advocates 
of evolution claim a cause, that there is a power in- 
herent in matter that produces and develops higher and 
higher forms of life. To show the absurdity of this 
proposition all we have to do is to trace nature back 
to the beginning, beyond the reach of the microscope, 
till finally we pass beyond matter into nothing, an un- 
stable base to build on. Whenever the advocates of 
evolution will produce perpetual motion, not some 
sham pretense, but a genuine case where power is 
evolved out of nothing, that can be used with profit to 
propel machinery, then and not till then will it be log- 
ical or analogous for them to ask us to believe that 
the universe was evolved out of nothing. Some evo- 
lutionists assume that matter is eternal, that it is with- 
out beginning or ending, that it has certain inherent 
properties that are inseparable from it. But they deny 



74 The Unknown Made Known. 

the existence of a supreme, allwise, omnipotent Being, 
that governs and directs and orders everything, alleg- 
ing that there is no proof of such a Being, but they 
fail to produce any proof to support their proposition. 
In a future chapter we will have something to say 
about the dealings of the Supreme Being with the soul 
of man and the evidences of the fact. We will here 
assume without further discussion that the soul of man 
in some way emanated from the Creator. We will 
also assume that man was the crowning act of physical 
creation. That his soul is really the man, the only real 
permanent individuality. Also that the soul at the 
creation was endowed with the quality of propagation. 
If we say that in the souls of our first progenitors, 
the souls of all their posterity existed potentially, we 
are stating a proposition that is in harmony with all 
the reproductive processes of nature. Any other ex- 
planation has no warrant in any natural process, and 
is without an analogous precedent. Hence we can say 
that we are the sons and daughters of Adam by tra- 
duction. This view is consistent, is logical, is nat- 
ural. Any other view is beset with difficulties, is with- 
out precedent, is without analogy. This view of the 
question makes it easy to understand regeneration and 
the second birth, so graphically described to Nicode- 
mus, by Jesus Christ, and why that second birth is 
necessary. 



CHAPTER VII. 

LIGHT AND SOUND. 

In the past few chapters we have endeavored to give 
a brief analysis of creation, which culminated in the 
creation of man. We will now attempt to analyze the 
process by which the soul of man is put in communica- 
tion with the universe ; to give an analysis of the physic- 
al agencies by which spirit and matter meet and com- 
municate. All know that light in some way is the 
medium by which we see. But what is light? And 
how is the sensation of light conveyed and made mani- 
fest to the soul? And how is it connected with 
thought? In like manner all know that sound is an 
important agent in conveying impressions to the un- 
derstanding. But how does sound do this? And 
what is sound? We have never yet seen an analysis 
of all these phenomena that was clear and satisfactory. 

We desire to state here that in discussing the laws 
of light, sound and heat, we follow Prof. John Tyndall, 
and we trust this acknowledgment will answer all rules 
of ethics, should we neglect to do so elsewhere. The 
time was when light was supposed to be elastic par- 
ticles of inconceivable minuteness, shot out with incon- 
ceivable rapidity, by luminous bodies, and that such 
particles impinging upon the retina of the eye, caused 
the sensation of sight. Sir Isaac Newton held stoutly 



76 The Unknown Made Known. 

to this theory, for theory it was, for it never had any 
existence in fact. It is now admitted, by all scientists, 
as an established fact, that light is vibrations in the 
luminiferous ether, and the impact of these vibrations 
against the retina of the eye causes the sensation of 
sight. Sound is almost identical with light in its na- 
ture. Sound, like light, is vibrations. Whilst light 
is vibrations in the luminiferous ether, sound is vibra- 
tions in the air. While the vibrations of light are in- 
conceivably rapid, the vibrations of sound are much 
slower. There are other senses by which the soul is 
put in communication with the outside world, but an 
analysis of the means by which communication is made 
by light and sound, will suffice for the purposes of this 
book. As this is not intended as a text book on any 
particular science, we have the right to assume that the 
reader is sufficiently acquainted with natural science, 
to understand that vibrations are a transference of mo- 
tion and energy or force through matter, while the 
matter itself remains stationary. And that this motion 
is the result of energy or force, that has been expended 
somewhere. When we consider that the waves of light 
travel at the rate of about 186,000 miles per second, 
equivalent to traveling around the earth about 7^2 
times in a second, our attention is called to two condi- 
tions. First, the wonderfully rapid flight of light; 
second, the inconceivable elasticity of the luminiferous 
ether. 

When we take into consideration the fact stated by 
astronomers, that a wave of light starting from a star 
of the 9th magnitude will consume fourteen hundred 



Light and Sound. 77 

years in reaching the earth,* and will then impinge 
upon the retina of the eye, and deliver the message it 
has been fourteen hundred years in bringing to the 
human soul, the understanding staggers in its attempt 
to understand or comprehend it! When we consider 
that the rarity and elasticity of the luminiferous ether 
is so great that a wave of light receives no diminution 
in its force, after a transit of over a thousand years, 
we begin to faintly comprehend something of the wis- 
dom and omnipotence of the Creator. Sound waves 
cannot be transmitted through the luminiferous ether 
for this reason. When a common pendulum oscillates 
it tends to form a condensation in front, and a rare- 
faction behind. But it is only a tendency, the motion 
is so slow and air so elastic, that it moves away in front 
before it is sensibly condensed, and fills the space be- 
hind before it can be sensibly dilated. Hence waves 
or pulses are not generated by the pendulum. It re- 
quires a certain sharpness of shock to produce the con- 
densation and rarefaction which constitutes a wave of 
sound in air. The more elastic and mobile the gas the 
more able will it be to move away in front and to fill 
the space behind, and to oppose the formation of rare- 
factions and condensations by a vibrating body. Now, 
luminiferous ether is infinitely more mobile than air, 
so much so that no condensations and consequent rare- 
factions would be possible by such a slow moving force 
as sound waves. For the opposite reason light waves 
cannot be transmitted through air. The waves of 



^Smithsonian Report, 1891, p. 103. 



78 The Unknown Made Known. 

light are so delicate and feeble that they could not pro- 
duce the rapid condensation necessary for their flight, 
in so dense a medium as air. To make this clearer, let 
us make a homely illustration. A frog by slow and 
steady strokes swims easily and nicely in water, because 
the density of the water is great enough so that the im- 
pact of the frog's feet is sufficient to send body for- 
ward. But if the frog were to attempt to swim in air 
his efforts would be fruitless, because the greater mobil- 
ity of the air would prevent any resistance to the frog's 
feet. Again the humming bird flies through the air 
with great speed and apparent ease, because the strokes 
of its wings are so rapid that there is sufficient re- 
sistance to drive the bird forward. But let the humming 
bird attempt to swim in the water, it would make as 
much of a failure as the frog trying to swim in air, be- 
cause the density of the water would effectually check 
the rapid strokes of its wings. So it is with sound and 
light, sound cannot travel in luminiferous ether, be- 
cause its slow motion causes no condensation, and 
hence there can be no vibrations. Light cannot travel 
in air because the resistance is too great to allow the 
rapid condensation necessary for the transmission of 
light, and also because the force that causes waves of 
light is too feeble to cause pulsations in air. 

We will have something more to say about the prop- 
erties of light and sound but it will be deferred until 
we attempt to give an analysis of the means by which 
impressions are communicated to the soul. 

Whenever we may have occasion to refer to the an- 
atomy of any organ, we will follow Gray, and this ac- 



Light and Sound. 79 

knowledgment, we trust, will suffice if we fail to do so 
at the proper time and place. 

All are aware that the eye is the organ of sight, that 
there is an opening in front to let in the light, that 
this opening can be expanded or contracted according- 
ly as the light is feeble or intense, that back of this 
opening is a delicate lens for the purpose of converg- 
ing the rays of light in order to intensify or centralize 
their effect, that the main cavity of the eye is filled 
with a vitreous humor, that is perhaps the most trans- 
parent substance in nature, and that behind this is the 
retina. 

The retina is a delicate nervous membrane, upon the 
surface of which the images of external objects are 
formed. The internal surface of the retina is an in- 
conceivably delicate nervous membrane, and is the ex- 
pansion of the terminal fibers of the optic nerve. Upon 
the exposed ends of these nervous fibers the waves of 
light impinge, and the impression they make is what we 
call sight. From what has been said about the in- 
finitely delicate nature of light-waves, we can form 
some sort of crude idea of the sensitiveness of the ex- 
posed nervous membrane of the retina. Let us an- 
alyze this a little. There has already been something 
said about the swift flight of the waves of light. But 
all waves of light are not of the same size or length. 
Moreover, the sensitiveness of the retina is acute 
enough to distinguish between the smallest variation 
in size or length. It seems incredible that the size of 
the waves of light and their rapidity can be measured. 
Yet it can be done. Those who are anxious to go into 



80 The Unknown Made Known. 

the details of this wonderful phenomenon are referred 
to the works of Prof. John Tyndall on Heat, and Light, 
and Sound, where all these phenomena are fully eluci- 
dated. 

Light travels through space at the velocity of 186,- 
ooo miles per second. Reducing this to inches we find 
the number to be 11,784,960,000. Now, it is found 
that 39,000 waves of red light placed end to end would 
make up an inch, multiplying the number of inches in 
186,000 miles by 39,000 we obtain the number of waves 
of red light embraced in a distance of 186,000, this num- 
ber is 459,613,440,000,000. All these waves enter the 
eye in a single second. To produce the impression of 
red the retina must be hit at this inconceivable rate. To 
produce the impression of violet, a still greater number 
of impulses is necessary. It would take 57,500 waves 
of violet to fill an inch, and the number of shocks re- 
quired to produce the impression of this color amounts 
to six hundred and seventy-eight millions of millions 
per second. The other colors of the spectrum rise 
gradually in pitch from red to violet. Beyond the 
violet we have rays of too high a pitch to be visible, 
they exceed the capacity of the eye, while beyond the 
red we have rays of too low a pitch to be visible, they 
do not fall within the capacity of the eye. When we 
consider the numberless shades of color the acute prac- 
tised eye is capable of distinguishing we begin to see 
how impossible it is for the human understanding to 
comprehend these fine distinctions. These impressions 
are made upon, and received by, the soul of man. Thus 
we see that when we get to where spirit and matter 



Light and Sound. 81 

meet we are in fine work. All the light waves are 
caused by an expenditure of energy or force at the 
sun, this energy of force is transferred by the waves of 
light to the retina of the eye, and there transferred by 
the optic nerve to the brain, where the sensation is re- 
ceived. Hence sensation is the result of force. But 
more about that further on. So much for the eye. 
We will now attempt to make an analysis of some of 
the functions of the ear. 

The ear is so complicated that it would be impossible 
to give a full anatomy of it here, neither would it be 
necessary. All understand that the ear is the organ of 
hearing, and that in some way sound enters the ear and 
an impression is made on the brain. The waves or 
vibrations of sound enter the external ear and impinge 
against the membrane of the tympanum. Here the 
waves are transferred to the middle ear, and conveyed 
by the chain of little bones to the fluids in the internal 
ear labyrinth. Here we find a most complicated struc- 
ture of small stones, delicate fibers, and the terminals 
of the auditory nerve fibers. In this wonderfully 
complicated labyrinth, the wave motion is modified and 
transferred to the auditory nerve, and thus the impres- 
sion of sound is carried to the brain. Why all this 
complicated structure ? Why don't the waves of sound 
impinge directly against the exposed ends of the nerve 
fibers of the auditory nerve just as the light waves 
impinge against the nerve fibers in the retina of the 
eye? Let us look into this a little and see if we can 
find out why this is so. 

We have just shown that 459,613,440,000,000 waves 



82 The Unknown Made Known. 

of light enter the eye in a single second, and that this 
produces the impression of red, and that six hundred 
and seventy-eight millions of millions of waves pro- 
duce the impression of violet, and that these two ex- 
tremes mark the boundary of the capacity of the eye. 
Sound waves are extremely sluggish compared with 
light waves. The smallest number of sound waves 
that the average ear can catch is about 16 per second. 
Less than this is below the capacity of the ear. The 
highest number of vibrations that the ear can catch is 
about 38,000 per second. More rapid vibrations ex- 
ceed the capacity of the ear. Musical sounds range 
from 40 to 4,000. These sluggish heavy waves im- 
pinging directly against the exposed nerves would have 
no effect whatever. Something must be done to modify 
these slow heavy sound waves to make them delicate 
enough so they will come within the capacity of the 
exposed nerve fibers of the auditory nerve. This is 
accomplished by the wonderfully complicated mech- 
anism of the ear. It seems from the structure of the 
ear that the waves of sound are not subdivided but di- 
vested of their harshness. If they were subdivided 
until they became as numerous as the waves of light 
they would produce the sensation of light in the brain. 
But by softening them they may retain their peculiar 
characteristics and still be able to make their impression 
upon the exposed nerve fibers. When we consider that 
every variety of sound, from the softest and most 
agreeable and pleasing, to the harshest and most un- 
bearable, is simply a variation of the force and length 
of the vibrations, we see what infinite variety can be 



Light and Sound. 83 

accomplished with few units. When we look out on 
the landscape and see the objects near and distant with 
all their variegated colors, and hear the innumerable 
sounds, musical and otherwise, that come from all di- 
rections, we have the sensation of transporting our- 
selves by some spiritual process, and examining the ob- 
jects we see and the cause of the sounds we hear. But 
all this is a delusion, what we see is a transitory picture 
on the retina of the eye, which is being constantly 
transferred to the brain, which is the true picture with 
which the soul comes in contact, and by which, what 
we call consciousness, becomes cognizant of the im- 
pression. What we hear are the miniature shocks re- 
ceived on the nerve fibers in the labyrinth of the ear 
and constantly transferred to the brain and there and 
there only do we hear and see. We never get outside 
our cranium, till we take our final exit. It is a pretty 
small prison, but there we are confined. 



ANATOMY. 

Illustrations of the anatomy of the brain, as list 
below, which would prove a useful reference for 
readers of the following chapter, may be found in 
Gray's Anatomy, American edition, published by 
Henry C. Lea, Philadelphia, 1870. 

Fig. 324. Medulla Oblongata and Pons Varolii. An- 
terior Surface. 
Fig. 325. Posterior Surface of Medulla Oblongata. 
Fig. 326. Transverse Section of Medulla Oblongata. 
Fig. 327. The Columns of the Medulla Oblongata 
and their connections with the Cerebrum and Cere- 
bellum. 
Fig. 328. Upper Surface of Brain, the Pia Mater hav- 
ing been removed. 
Fig. 329. Base of the Brain. 
Fig. 33°- Section of the Brain. Made on a level with 
the Corpus Callosum. 
Fig. 331. The Lateral Ventricles of the Brain. 
Fig. 332. The Fornix, Velum Interpositum and Mid- 
dle or Descending Cornu of trie Lateral Ventricle. 
Fig. 333. The Third and Fourth Ventricle. 
Fig. 334. Upper Surface of the Cerebellum. 
Fig- 335- Under Surface of the Cerebellum. 
Fig. 336. Vertical Section of the Cerebellum. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

NERVOUS SYSTEM — ANATOMY. 

The whole nervous system is so intimately connected, 
and in its operations is in such sympathetic accord, that 
it is almost impossible to treat of the functions of the 
brain, without treating, to some extent, of the nervous 
system in general. Therefore, as far as our purpose 
requires, we will take a passing notice of the nervous 
system in general, and of the brain in particular. 

We will first examine nervous tissue. There are two 
grand divisions of nervous matter or nervous structure, 
the gray or vesicular, and the white or fibrous. Gray 
in his anatomy (p. 57) says, in speaking of these two 
formations : "It is in the former, as is generally sup- 
posed, that nervous impressions and impulses originate, 
and by the latter that they are conducted. Hence the 
gray matter forms the essential constituent of all the 
ganglionic centers, both those separated in the ganglia 
and those aggregated in the cerebro-spinal axis, while 
the white matter is found in all the commissural por- 
tions of the nerve centers, and in all the cerebro-spinal 
nerves. Besides these two principal kinds of nervous 
matter, there is a third structure — chiefly in the sympa- 
thetic system — called the gelatinous nerve tissue. 

The gray or vesicular nervous substance is dis- 
tinguished by its dark reddish-gray color and soft con- 
sistence. It is found in thel>rain, spinal cord, and vari- 



86 The Unknown Made Known. 

ous ganglia, intermingled with the fibrous nervous sub- 
stance, but is never found in the nerves. It is com- 
posed, as its name implies, of vesicles, or corpuscles, 
or ganglion-corpuscles, containing nuclei and nucleoli ; 
the vesicles being embedded either in a fine granular 
substance, as in the brain, or in a capsule of nucleated 
cells, as in the ganglia. Each vesicle consists of an 
exceedingly delicate membraneous wall, inclosing a 
finely granular material, part of which is occasionally 
of a coarser kind, and of reddish or yellowish-brown 
color. The nucleus is vesicular, much smaller than the 
vesicle, and adherent to some, part of its interior. The 
nucleolus which is inclosed within the nucleus, is vesic- 
ular in form, of minute size, and peculiarly clear and 
brilliant. The nerve-corpuscles vary in shape and size ; 
some are small, spherical, or ovoidal, with an uninter- 
rupted outline. These forms are the most numerous 
in the ganglia of the sympathetic. Others called cau- 
date or stellate nerve-corpuscles, are characterized by 
their large size, and from having one or more tail-like 
processes issuing from them, which occasionally divide 
and subdivide into numerous branches. These proces- 
ses are very delicate, apparently tubular, and contain 
a similar granular material to that found within the 
corpuscles. Some of these processes terminate in fine 
transparent fibers, which become lost among the other 
elements of the nervous tissue; others may be traced 
until, after losing their granular appearance, they be- 
come continuous with an ordinary nerve fiber. 

The white, otherwise called tubular or fibrous nerv- 
ous substance, is found constituting a great part of 



Anatomy. &y 

the brain and spinal cord, almost the whole of the cere- 
brospinal nerves, and a great part of the sympathetic. 

The tubes when perfectly fresh appear to be homo- 
geneous, but soon separate into two parts, the white 
substance of Schwam and the axis-cylinder of Purkinje, 
the whole being included in a structureless membrane 
— the tubular membrane. The white substance is re- 
garded as being a fatty matter in a fluid state, which 
isolates and protects the essential part of the nerve — 
the axis-cylinder. The partial coagulation of this white 
substance which follows on cooling, gives the nerve 
tubes, when examined after death, a double contour — 
the darker part seen on the outside of the axis-cylinder 
being the white substance of Schwam. In consequence 
of the extreme delicacy of the tubular membrane, even 
slight pressure will often give nerve-tubes a varicose 
outline, and drops of oil, from the transudation of fatty 
matter, often form outside the tubular membrane. 
This is of course, promoted by the action of ether. 

The axis-cylinder constitutes about one-half or one- 
third of the nerve tube, the white substance being great- 
er in proportion in the nerve than in the central organs. 
The axis-cylinder is perfectly transparent, and is there- 
fore indistinguishable in a perfectly fresh and natural 
state of nerve. It is described, by Kolliker, as being 
distinguished from the white substance by the fact that 
though soft and flexible it is not fluid and viscid, but 
firm and elastic, somewhat like coagulated albumen, 
with which it appears for the most part also to agree 
in its chemical character. In appearance it is pale and 
homogeneous, or more rarely finely grained or striated. 



88 The Unknown Made Known. 

With regard to the constitution of the different por- 
tions of the nervous system, the cerebro-spinal axis is 
composed of the two above described kinds of nervous 
structure, intermingled in various proportions, and hav- 
ing in the brain a very intricate arrangement, which can 
only be fully understood by a careful study of the de- 
tails of its descriptive anatomy in the sequel. The gray 
or vesicular nervous matter is found partly on the sur- 
face of the brain, forming the convolutions of the cere- 
brum, which are in the most direct relation to the men- 
tal faculties, and the lamina of the cerebellum, the func- 
tions of which are still a matter of dispute. Again, 
gray matter is found in the interior of the brain, collect- 
ed into large and distinct masses or ganglionic bodies, 
such as the corpus striatum, optic thalamus, and cor- 
pora quadrigemina, the functions of which bodies, so 
far as they have been ascertained, have been found to 
be connected with some of the main organic endow- 
ments of the body, such as voluntary motion, sensation, 
sight. Finally gray matter is found intermingled with 
the white, and without definite arrangement, as in the 
corpora dentata of the medulla and cerebellum, or the 
gray matter in the pons and the floor of the fourth 
ventricle. Such scattered masses of gray matter are, 
in many instances at any rate, connected to all appear- 
ances with the origin of particular senses. In other 
situations their use is yet unknown. 

The white matter of the brain is divisible into four 
distinct classes of fibers. There are in the first place, 
the nerves which arise in the gray matter, and pass 
out through the cranial foramina. Next the fibers 






Anatomy. 89 

which connect the brain with the spinal cord, that is 
to say, those which are usually traced upwards from 
the columns of the spinal cord, through the medulla 
oblongata into the cerebrum, chiefly by means of the 
anterior pyramids, fasciculi teretes, and rectiform 
bodies, passing through the pons and crura cerebri, to 
expand into the corpora atriata, optic thalami, and con- 
volutions (corona radiata), and by means of the recti- 
form bodies, into the cerebellum. 

The other two classes of white fibers in the brain 
are commissural; some of the commissures serving to 
connect different parts of the same hemisphere together 
(as the fornix, the processus e cerebello ad testes, etc.), 
or even different parts of the same section or organ, 
as the arctiform fibers of the medulla. Most of these 
commissures are longitudinal ; while others — as the cor- 
pus callosum and the transverse fibers of the pons Va- 
rolii — are transverse, serving to connect opposite hemi- 
spheres together, and thus probably securing the single 
action of a double organ. 

Spinal cord. In the spinal cord the gray matter is 
entirely in the interior of the organ, and is collected 
together into one central mass, while the whole of the 
white matter is external, and is arranged into various 
columns and commissures. 

The Ganglia may be regarded as separate and inde- 
pendent nervous centers of smaller size than the brain, 
connected with each other, with the cerebro-spinal axis, 
and with the nerves in various situations. 

The Nerves are round or flattened cords, which are 
connected at one end with the cerebro-spinal center or 



90 The Unknown Made Known. 

the ganglia, and are distributed, at the other, to the 
various textures of the body ; they are subdivided into 
two great classes, the cerebro-spinal, which proceeds 
from the cerebro-spinal axis, and the sympathetic or 
ganglionic nerves, which proceed from the ganglia of 
the sympathetic. 

The nerve fibers, both of the cerebro-spinal and sym- 
pathetic system, convey impressions of a twofold kind. 
The sensory nerves, called also centripetal or afferent 
nerves, transmit to the nerve centers impressions made 
upon the peripheral extremities of the nerves, and in 
this way the mind, through the medium of the brain, 
becomes conscious of external objects. The motor 
nerves, called the centrifugal or efferent nerves, trans- 
mit impressions from the nervous centers to the parts 
to which the nerves are distributed, these impressions 
either exciting muscular contractions, or influencing 
the processes of nutrition, growth, and secretion." 

We have thus quoted quite freely from Gray's Anat- 
omy to show the structure of the nerves and nervous 
matter. Subsequently we will have occasion to refer 
to the foregoing in order to make our meaning clear. 

We will now consider the anatomy of the brain, and 
as the spinal cord is closely connected with the brain, in 
many, if not all of its functions, we will give that a 
passing notice. 

THE SPINAL CORD. 

The Spinal Cord {medulla spinalis) is the cylindrical 
elongated part of the cerebro-spinal axis, which is con- 
tained in the spinal canal. 



Anatomy. 91 

Structure of the Cord. If a transverse section of the 
spinal cord be made, it will be seen to consist of white 
and gray nervous substance. The white matter is situ- 
ated externally and constitutes the greater part. The 
gray substance occupies the center, and is so arranged 
as to present on the surface of the section two con- 
centric masses placed one in each lateral half of the 
cord, united together by a transverse band of gray mat- 
ter, the gray commissure. Each crescentic mass has an 
anterior and posterior horn. The posterior horn is 
long and narrow, and approaches the surface of the 
posterior lateral fissure, near which it presents a slight 
enlargement. The anterior horn is short and thick, 
and does not quite reach the surface, but extends 
toward the point of attachment of the anterior roots of 
the nerves. Its margin presents a dentate or stellate 
appearance. Owing to the projections toward the 
surface of the anterior and posterior horns of the gray 
matter, each half of the cord is divided, more or less 
completely, into three columns, anterior, middle, and 
posterior; the anterior and middle being joined to form 
the antero-lateral column, as the anterior does not quite 
reach the surface. 

We will not stop to examine the investing membranes 
of the brain, but simply give the anatomy of the brain 
proper. 

"The Brain (encephalon) is that portion of the 
cerebro-spinal axis that is contained in the cranial cavi- 
ty. It is divided into four principal parts, vis., the 
cerebrum, the cerebellum, the pons Varolii, and the me- 
dulla oblongata. 



92 The Unknown Made Known. 

The cerebrum forms the largest portion of the en- 
cephalon, and occupies a considerable part of the cavity 
of the cranium, resting in the anterior and middle 
fossae of the base of the skull, and separated posteriorly 
from the cerebellum by the tentorium cerebelli. About 
the middle of the under surface is a narrow constricted 
portion, part of which, the crura cerebri, is continued 
onward into the pons Varolii below, and through it 
into the medulla oblongata and spinal cord ; whilst an- 
other portion, the crura cerebelli, passes down into 
the cerebellum. 

The cerebellum (little brain or after brain) is situated 
in the inferior occipital fossae being separated from the 
under surface of the posterior lobes of the cerebrum by 
the tentorium cerebelli. It is connected to the rest 
of the encephalon by means of connecting bands, called 
crura 9 of these two ascend to the cerebrum, two descend 
to the medulla oblongata, and two blend together in 
front, forming the pons Varolii. 

The pons Varolii is that portion of the encephalon 
which rests upon the upper part of the basilar process. 
It constitutes the band of union of the various seg- 
ments above named, receiving, above, the crura from 
the cerebrum ; at the sides the crura from the cerebel- 
lum, and below, the medulla oblongata. 

The medulla oblongata extends from the lower 
border of the pons Varolii to the upper part of the 
spinal cord. It lies beneath the cerebellum, resting 
on the lower part of the basilar groove of the occipital 
bone. 



Anatomy. 93 

MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 

The Medulla Oblongata is the upper enlarged part 
of the spinal cord, and extends from the upper border 
of the atlas to the lower border of the pons Varolii. It 
is directed obliquely downward and backward; its an- 
terior surface rests on the basilar groove of the occip- 
ital bone, its posterior surface is received into the 
fossae between the hemispheres of the cerebellum, form- 
ing the floor of the fourth ventricle. It is pyramidal in 
form, its broad extremity directed upward, its lower 
end being narrow at its point of connection with the 
cord. Its surface is marked in the median line, in front 
and behind, by an anterior and posterior medial fissure, 
which are continuous with those of the spinal cord. 
These two fissures divide the medulla into two sym- 
metrical halves, each lateral half being subdivided by 
minor grooves into four columns, which, from before 
backwards, are named the anterior pyramid, lateral 
tract and olivary body, the rectiform body, the posterior 
pyramid. 

The anterior pyramids or corpora pyramidalia, are 
two pyramidal shaped bundles of white matter, placed 
one on either side of the anterior median fissure, and 
separated from the olivary body, which is external to 
them, by a slight depression. At the lower border of 
the pons they are somewhat constricted ; they then be- 
come enlarged, and taper slightly as they descend be- 
ing continuous below with the anterior columns of the 
cord. On separating the pyramids below, it will be 



94 The Unknown Made Known. 

observed that their innermost fibers form four to five 
bundles on each side which decussate with one another ; 
this decussation, however, is not formed entirely with 
fibers from the pyramids, but mainly from the deep 
portions of the lateral columns of the cord which pass 
forward to the surface between the diverging anterior 
columns, the anterior fibers do not decussate ; they are 
derived from the anterior columns of the cord, and are 
continued upward through the pons Varolii. 

Lateral tract and olivary body. The lateral tract is 
continuous with the lateral column of the cord. Below, 
it is broad, and includes that part of the medulla be- 
tween the anterior pyramid and the rectiform body — 
but, above, it is pushed a little backward of the olivary 
body. 

The olivary bodies are two prominent, oval masses, 
situated behind the anterior pyramids, from which they 
are separated by slight grooves. They equal in breadth 
the anterior pyramids, are a little broader above than 
below, and are about half an inch in length, being sep- 
arated, above, from the pons Varolii by a slight de- 
pression. Numerous white fibers (fibrse arciformes) 
are seen winding round the lower end of each body; 
sometimes crossing their surface. 

- The restiform bodies are the largest columns of the 
medulla, and are continuous below, with the posterior 
columns of the cord. They are two rounded cord- 
like eminences, placed between the lateral tracts, in 
front, and the posterior pyramids behind, from both of 
which they are separated by slight grooves. As they 
ascend, they diverge from each other, assist in form- 



Anatomy. 95 

ing the lateral boundaries of the fourth ventricle, and 
then enter the cerebellum, forming its inferior ped- 
uncle; it is probable that some fibers are continued 
from the recti form bodies into the cerebrum. 

The posterior pyramids {fasciculi graciles) are two 
narrow white cords, placed one on each side of the 
posterior median fissure, and separated from the recti- 
form bodies by a narrow groove. They consist en- 
tirely of white fibers, and are continuous with the pos- 
terior median columns of the spinal cord. These 
bodies lie, at first, in close contact. Opposite the apex 
of the fourth ventricle they form an enlargement 
(processus clavatus), and then, diverging, are lost in 
the corresponding rectiform body. The upper part of 
the posterior pyramids forms the lateral boundary of 
the calamus scriptorious. 

The posterior surface of the medulla oblongata forms 
part of the floor of the fourth ventricle. It is of a 
triangular form, bounded on each side by the diverging 
posterior pyramids, and in that part of the ventricle 
which, from its resemblance to the point of a pen, is 
called calamus scriptorius. The divergence of the pos- 
terior pyramids and rectiform bodies, opens to view 
the gray matter of the medulla, which is continuous, 
below, with the gray commissure of the cord. In the 
middle line is seen a longitudinal furrow, continuous 
with the posterior median fissure of the cord, terminat- 
ing below, at the point of the ventricle, in a cul-de-sac, 
the ventricle of Arantius, which descends into the 
medulla for a slight extent. It is the remains of a 



96 The Unknown Made Known. 

canal, which, in the fetus, extends throughout the en- 
tire length of the cord. 

Structure. The columns of the cord are directly 
continuous with those of the medulla oblongata, below, 
but higher up, both the white and the gray constituents 
are rearranged before they are continued upward to 
the cerebrum and cerebellum. 

The anterior pyramid is composed of fibers derived 
from the anterior column of the cord of its own side, 
and from the lateral column of the opposite half of 
the cord, and is continued upward into the cerebrum 
and cerebellum. The cerebellar fibers form a super- 
ficial and deep layer, which pass beneath the olivary 
body to the rectiform body, and spread out into the 
structure of the cerebellum. A deep fasciculus encloses 
the olivary body, and receiving fibers from it, enters 
the pons as the olivary fasciculus or fillet ; but the chief 
mass of fibers from the pyramid, the cerebral fibers, 
enter the pons in their passage upward to the cerebrum. 
The anterior pyramids contain no gray matter. 

The lateral tract is continuous below, with the lateral 
column of the cord. Its fibers pass in three different 
directions. The most external join the rectiform body, 
and pass to the cerebellum. The internal, more numer- 
ous, pass forward, pushing aside the fibers of the an- 
terior column, and form part of the opposite anterior 
pyramid. The middle fibers ascend, beneath the olivary 
body, to the cerebrum passing along back of the pons, 
and form, together with fibers from the rectiform body, 
the fasciculi teretes, in the floor of the fourth ventricle. 

Olivary body. If a transverse section is made 



Anatomy. 97 

through the olivary body, it will be found to consist 
of a small ganglionic mass, deeply imbedded in the 
medulla, partly appearing on the surface as smooth, 
olive shaped eminence. It consists, externally, of white 
substance ; and internally, of a gray nucleus, the corpus 
dentatum. The gray matter is arranged in the form 
of a hollow capsule, open at its upper and inner part, 
and presenting a zigzag or dentated outline. White 
fibers pass into, or from the interior of this body, by 
the aperture in the posterior part of the capsule. They 
join with those fibers of the anterior column which 
ascend on the outer side, and beneath the olivary body, 
to form the olivary fasciculus, which ascends to the 
cerebrum. 

The recti form body is formed chiefly of fibers from 
the posterior column of the cord; but it receives some 
from the lateral column, and a fasciculus from the an- 
terior, and is continued upward to the cerebrum. On 
entering the pons, it divides into two fasciculi, above 
the point of the fourth ventricle. The external fascic- 
ulus enters the cerebellum : the inner fasciculus joins 
the posterior pyramid, is continued up along the fourth 
ventricle, and is traced up to the cerebrum with the 
fasciculi teretes. 

Septum of the medulla oblongata. Above the decus- 
sation of the anterior pyramids, numerous white fibers 
extend, from behind forward, in the median line, form- 
ing a septum, which subdivides the medulla into two 
lateral halves. Some of these fibers emerge at the an- 
terior median fissure, and form a band which curves 
round the lower border of the olivary body, or passes 



98 The Unknown Made Known. 

transversly across it, and round the sides of the medul- 
la, forming the arciform fibers of Rolando. Others 
appear on the floor of the fourth ventricle, issuing from 
the posterior median fissure, and form the white striae 
in that situation. 

Gray matter of the medulla oblongata. The gray 
matter of the medulla is a continuation of that con- 
tained in the interior of the spinal cord, besides a series 
of special deposits or nuclei. 

In the lower part of the medulla, the gray matter is 
arranged as in the cord, but at the upper part it be- 
comes more abundant, and is disposed with less ap- 
parent regularity, becoming blended with all the white 
fibers, except the anterior pyramids. The part cor- 
responding to the transverse gray commissure of the 
cord is exposed to view in the floor of the medulla 
oblongata, by the divergence of the rectiform bodies, 
and posterior pyramids, becoming blended with the 
ascending fibers of the lateral column, and thus form- 
ing the fasciculi teretes. The lateral crescentic por- 
tions, but especially the posterkvt horns, become en- 
larged, blend with the fibers of the rectiform bodies, 
and form the tuberculo cinereo of Rolando. 

Special deposits of gray matter are found in the an- 
terior and posterior parts of the medulla, forming in 
the former situation, the corpus dentatum within the 
olivary body, and in the latter, a series of special mass- 
es, or nuclei, connected with the roots of origin of the 
spinal accessory, vagus, glossopharyngeal, and hypo- 
glossal nerves. It thus appears that the close analogy 
of structure, and also probably in general endowments, 



Anatomy. 99 

exists between the medulla oblongata and the spinal 
cord. The larger size and peculiar form of the medulla 
depends on the enlargement, divergence, and decussa- 
tion of the various columns, and also on the addition 
of special deposits of gray matter in the olivary bodies 
and other parts, evidently in adaptation to the more ex- 
tended range of function which this part of the cerebro- 
spinal axis possesses. 

pons varolii. 

The Pons Varolii (mesocephale, Chaussier), is the 
bond of union of the various segments of the enceph- 
alon, connecting the cerebrum above, the medulla ob- 
longata below, and the cerebellum behind. It is situ- 
ated above the medulla oblongata, below the crura 
cerebri, and between the hemispheres of the cerebellum. 

Its under surface presents a broad transverse band 
of white fibers, which arches like a bridge across the 
upper part of the medulla, extending between the two 
hemispheres of the cerebrum. This surface projects 
considerably beyond the level of these parts, is of a 
quadrangular form, rests upon the basilar groove of 
the occipital bone, and is limited before and behind by 
very prominent margins. It presents along the middle 
line a longitudinal groove, wider in front than behind, 
which lodges the basilar artery; numerous transverse 
strise are also observed on each side, which indicates 
the course of its superficial fibers. 

Its upper surface forms part of the floor of the 
fourth ventricle, and at each side it becomes contracted 



L.ofC. 



ioo The Unknown Made Known. 

into a thick rounded cord, the crus cerebelli, which en- 
ters the substance of the cerebellum, constituting the 
middle peduncle. 

Structure. The pons Varolii consists of alternate 
layers of transverse and longitudinal fibers intermixed 
with gray matter. 

The transverse fibers connect together the two lateral 
hemispheres of the cerebellum, and constitute its great 
transverse commissure. They consist of a superficial 
and a deep layer. The superficial layer passes uninter- 
ruptedly across the surface of the pons, forming a uni- 
form layer, which consists of fibers derived from the 
crus cerebelli on each side, meeting in the median line. 
The deep layer of transverse fibers decussate with the 
longitudinal fibers continued up from the medulla, and 
contains much gray matter between its fibers. 

The longitudinal fibers are continued up through the 
pons. i. From the anterior pyramid. 2. From the 
olivary body. 3. From the lateral and posterior col- 
umns of the cord, receiving special fibers from the 
gray matter of the pons itself. 

1. The fibers from the anterior pyramid ascend 
through the pons, imbedded between two layers of 
transverse fibers, being subdivided in their course into 
small bundles ; at the upper end of the pons they enter 
the crus cerebri, forming its fasciculated portion. 

2. The olivary fasciculus divides the pons into two 
bundles, one of which ascends to the corpora quadri- 
gemina; the other is continued to the cerebrum with 
the fibers of the lateral column. 

3. The fibers from the lateral and posterior columns 



Anatomy. 101 

of the cord, with a bundle from the olivary fasciculus, 
are intermixed with much gray matter, and appear 
in the floor of the fourth ventricle as the fasciculi terre- 
tes; they ascend to the deep or cerebral part of the 
crus cerebri. 

Foville believes that a few fibers from each of the 
longitudinal tracts of the medulla turn forward, and 
are continuous with the transverse fibers of the pons. 

Septum. The pons is divided into lateral halves by 
the median septum, which extends through its pos- 
terior half. The septum consists of antero-posterior 
and transverse fibers. The former are derived from 
the floor of the fourth ventricle and from the trans- 
verse fibers of the pons, which bend backward before 
passing across to the opposite side. The latter are de- 
rived from the floor of the fourth ventricle ; they pierce 
the longitudinal fibers, and are then continued across 
from one to the other side of the medulla, piercing the 
antero-posterior fibers. The two halves of the pons, 
in front, are connected together by transverse commis- 
sural fibers. 

UPPER SURFACE OF CEREBRUM. 

The cerebrum, in man, constitutes the largest portion 
of the encephalon. Its upper surface is of an oval form, 
broader behind than in front, convex in its general out- 
line, and divided into two lateral halves or hemispheres, 
right and left, by the great longitudinal fissure, which 
extends throughout the entire length of the cerebrum 
in the middle line, reaching down to the base of the 



102 The Unknown Made Known. 

brain in front and behind, but interrupted in the middle 
by a broad transverse commissure of white matter, the 
corpus callosum, which connects the two hemispheres 
together. This fissure lodges the falx cerebri, and in- 
dicates the original development of the brain by two 
halves. 

Each hemisphere presents an outer surface, which 
is convex, to correspond with the vault of the cranium, 
an inner surface, flattened, and in contact with the op- 
posite hemisphere (the two inner surfaces forming the 
sides of the longitudinal fissure) ; and an under sur- 
face or base, of more irregular form, which rests, in 
front, on the anterior and middle fossa at the base 
of the skull, and behind, upon the tentorium. 

Convolutions. If the pia mater is removed with the 
forceps, the entire surface of each hemisphere will be 
seen to present a number of convoluted eminences, the 
convolutions — the convolutions separated from each 
other by depressions (sulci) of various depths. The 
outer surface of each convolution, as well as the sides 
and bottom of the sulci between them is composed of 
gray matter, which is here called the cortical substance. 
The interior of each convolution is composed of white 
matter ; and white fibers also blend with the gray mat- 
ter at the sides and bottom of the sulci. By this ar- 
rangement the convolutions are adapted to increase 
the amount of gray matter without occupying much 
additional space, while they also afford a greater extent 
of surface for the termination of the white fibers in 
gray matter. On close examination, however, the cor- 
ticle substance is found subdivided into four layers, 



Anatomy. 103 

two of which are composed of gray and two of white 
matter. The most external is an outer white stratum, 
not equally thick over all parts of the brain, being most 
marked on the convolutions in the longitudinal fissure 
and on the under part of the brain, especially on the 
middle lobe, near the descending horn of the lateral 
ventricle. Beneath this is a thick reddish-gray lamina, 
and then another thin white stratum ; lastly a thin stra- 
tum of gray matter, which lies in close contact with 
the white fibers of the hemispheres. Consequently 
white and gray laminae alternate with each other in the 
convolutions. In certain convolutions, however, the 
corticle substance consists of no less than six layers, 
three gray and three white, an additional white stra- 
tum dividing the most superficial gray one into two. 
This is especially marked in those convolutions which 
are situated near the corpus callosum. 

There is no accurate resemblance between the con- 
volutions in different brains, nor are they symmetrical 
on the two sides of the same brain. Occasionally the 
free borders of the sides of a deep convolution pre- 
sents a fissured or notched appearance. 

The sulci are generally an inch in depth, they also 
vary in different brains. They are usually deeper on the 
outer convex surface of the hemisphere ; the deepest is 
situated on the inner surface of the hemisphere, on a 
level with the corpus callosum, and corresponds to the 
projections in the posterior horn of the lateral ven- 
tricle, the hippocampus minor. 

The number and extent of the convolutions, as well 
as their depth, appear to bear a close relation to the 



104 The Unknown Made Known. 

intellectual power of the individual, as is shown in 
their increasing complexity of arrangements as we as- 
cend from the lowest mammals up to man. Thus they 
are absent in some of the lower orders of mammalia, 
and they increase in number and extent through the 
higher orders. In man they present the most complex 
arrangement. Again, in the child at birth before the 
intellectual faculties are exercised, the convolutions 
have a very simple arrangement, presenting few undu- 
lations, and the sulci between them are less deep than 
in the adult. In old age, when the mental faculties 
have diminished in activity, the convolutions become 
much less prominently marked. 

Those convolutions which are largest and most con- 
stantly present, are the convolutions of the corpus cal- 
losum, the convolutions of the longitudinal fissure, the 
supraorbital convolution, and the convolutions of the 
outer surface of the hemisphere. 

The convolution of the corpus callosum (gyrus for- 
nicatus) is always well marked. It lies parallel with 
the free surface of the corpus callosum, commencing, 
on the under surface of the brain, in front of the an- 
terior perforated space, it winds the curved border of 
the corpus callosum, and passes along its upper surface 
as far as its posterior extremity, where it is connected 
with the convolutions of the posterior lobe, it then 
curves downward and forward, embracing the cere- 
bral peduncle, passes into the middle lobe, forming the 
hippocampus major, and terminates just behind the 
point from whence it arose. 



Anatomy. 105 

The supraorbital convolution on the under surface 
of the anterior lobe is well marked. 

The convolution of the longitudinal fissure bounds 
the margin of the fissure on the upper surface of the 
hemisphere. It commences on the under surface of the 
brain, at the anterior perforated space, passes forward 
along the margin of the anterior lobe, being here di- 
vided by a deep sulcus, in which the olfactory nerve is 
received, it then curves over the anterior and upper 
surface of the longitudinal fissure to its posterior ex- 
tremity, where it curves forward along the under sur- 
face of the hemisphere as far as the middle lobe. 

The convolutions on the outer convex surface of the 
hemisphere, the general direction of which is more 
or less oblique, are the largest and most complicated 
convolutions of the brain, frequently becoming 
branched like the letter Y in their course upward and 
backward toward the longitudinal fissure; these con- 
volutions attain their greatest development in man, and 
are especially characteristic of the human brain. They 
are seldom symmetrical on the two sides. 

UNDER SURFACE, OR BASE, OF CEREBRUM. 

The under surface of each hemisphere presents a 
subdivision, as already mentioned, into three lobes, 
named from their position, anterior, middle and pos- 
terior. 

The anterior lobe, of a triangular form with its apex 
backward, is somewhat concave, and rests upon the 
convex surface of the roof of the orbit, being separated 



106 The Unknown Made Known. 

from the middle lobe by the fissure of Sylvius. The 
middle lobe, which is more prominent, is received into 
the middle fossa of the base of the skull. The posterior 
lobe rests upon the tentorium, its extent forward being 
limited by the anterior margin of the cerebellum. 

The various objects exposed to view on the under 
surface of the cerebrum, in and near the middle line, 
are here arranged in the order in which they are met 
with from before backward. 

Longitudinal fissure. 

Corpus callosum and its peduncles. 

Lamina cinerea. 

Olfactory nerve. 

Fissure of Sylvius. 

Anterior perforated space. 

Optic commissure. 

Tuber cinereum. 

Inf undibulum. 

Pituitary body. 

Corpora albicantia. 

Posterior perforated space. 

Crura cerebri. 

The longitudinal fissure partially separates the two 
hemispheres from one another; it divides the two an- 
terior lobes in front : and on raising the cerebellum 
and pons, it will be seen completely separating the two 
hemispheres, the intermediate portion of the fissure 
being filled up by the great transverse band of white 
matter, the corpus callosum. Of these two portions 
of the longitudinal fissure, that which separates the 
posterior lobes is the longest. In the fissure between 



Anatomy. 107 

the two anterior lobes the anterior cerebral artery may 
be seen ascending to the corpus callosum, and at the 
back part of this portion of the fissure, the anterior 
curved portion of the corpus callosum descends to 
the base of the brain. 

The corpus callosum terminates at the base of the 
brain by a concave margin, which is connected with 
the tuber cinereum through the intervention of a thin 
layer of gray substance, the lamina cinerea. This may 
be exposed by gently raising and drawing back the 
optic commissure. A broad white band may be ob- 
served on each side, passing from the under surface 
of the corpus callosum backward and outward, to the 
commencement of the fissure of Sylvius; these bands 
are called the peduncles of the corpus callosum. Later- 
ally, the corpus callosum extends into the anterior 
lobe. 

The lamina cinerea is a thin layer of gray sub- 
stance, extending backward above the optic commissure 
from the termination of the corpus callosum to the 
tuber cinereum. It is continuous on either side with 
the gray matter of the anterior perforated space, and 
forms the anterior part of the inferior boundary of 
the third ventricle. 

The olfactory nerve, with its bulb, is seen on either 
side of the longitudinal fissure, upon the under surface 
of each anterior lobe. 

The fissure of Sylvius separates the anterior and 
middle lobes, and lodges the middle and cerebral artery. 
At its commencement is seen a point of medullary sub- 



108 The Unknown Made Known. 

stance, corresponding to a subjacent band of white 
fibers, connecting the anterior and middle lobes, and 
called the fasciculus unciformis; on following this fis- 
sure outward, it divides into two branches, which in- 
close a triangular-shaped prominent cluster of iso- 
lated convolutions, the island of Reil. These convolu- 
tions, from being covered in by the sides of the fissure, 
are called gyri operti. 

The anterior perforated space is situated at the in- 
ner side of the fissure of Sylvius. It is of a triangular 
shape, bounded in front by the convolutions of the an- 
terior lobe and the roots of the olfactory nerve; 
behind, by the opic tract; externally, by the middle 
lobe and commencement of the fissure of Sylvius; in- 
ternally, it is continuous with the lamina cinerea, and 
crossed by the peduncle of the corpus callosum. It 
is of grayish color, and corresponds to the under sur- 
face of the corpus striatum, a large mass of gray mat- 
ter, situated in the interior of the brain; it has re- 
ceived its name from being perforated by numerous 
apertures for the transmission of small straight ves- 
sels into the substance of the corpus striatum. 

The optic commissure is situated in the middle line, 
immediately behind the lamina cinerea. It is the point 
of junction between the two optic nerves. 

Immediately behind the diverging optic tracts, and 
between them and the peduncles of the cerebrum 
(crura cerebri) is a lozenge-shaped interval, the inter- 
peduncular space, in which are found the following 
parts, arranged in the following order from before 
backward : the tuber cinereum, infundibulum, pituitary 



Anatomy. 109 

body, corpora albicantia, and the posterior perforated 
space. 

The tuber cine re um is an eminence of gray matter, 
situated between the optic tracts and the corpora albi- 
cantia; it is connected with the surrounding parts of 
the cerebrum, forms part of the floor of the third ven- 
tricle, and is continuous with the gray substance in 
that cavity. From the middle of its under surface a 
conical tubular process of gray matter, about two lines 
in length, is continued downward and forward, to be 
attached to the posterior lobe of the pituitary body; 
this is the infundibulum. Its canal, which is funnel- 
shaped, communicates with the third ventricle. 

The pituitary body is a small reddish-gray vascular 
mass, weighing from five to ten grains, and of an oval 
form, situated in the sella Turcica, in connection with 
which it is retained by the dura mater forming the in- 
ner wall of the cavernous sinus. It is very vascular, 
and consists of two lobes, separated from one another 
by a fibrous lamina. Of these the anterior is the larger, 
of an oblong form, and somewhat concave behind, 
where it receives the posterior lobe, which is round. 
The anterior lobe consists externally of a yellowish- 
gray substance, and internally of a soft pulpy substance 
of a yellowish-whte color. The posterior lobe is 
darker than the anterior. In the fetus it is larger pro- 
portionately than in the adult, and contains a cavity 
which communicates through the infundibulum with 
the third ventricle. In the adult it is firmer and more 
solid, and seldom contains any cavity. Its structure, 
especially the anterior lobe, is similar to that of the 
ductless glands. 



no Tlie Unknown Made Known. 

The corpora albicantia are two small round white 
masses, each about the size of a pea, placed side by 
side immediately behind the tuber cinereum. 

They are formed by the anterior crura of the fornix, 
hence called the bulbs of the fornix, which after de- 
scending to the base of the brain, are folded upon 
themselves, before passing upward to the thalami 
optici. They are composed externally of white sub- 
stance, and internally of gray matter; the gray matter 
of the two being connected by a transverse commissure 
of the same material. At an early period of fetal life 
they are blended together in one mass, but become sep- 
arated about the seventh month. 

The posterior perforated space {pons Tarini) cor- 
responds to a whitish-gray substance, placed before the 
corpora albicantia in front, the pons Varolii behind, 
and die crura cerebri on either side. It forms the back 
part of the floor of the third ventricle, and is per- 
forated by numerous small orifices for the passage of 
blood vessels to the thalami optici. 

The crura cerebri (peduncles of the cerebrum) are 
two thick cylindrical bundles of white matter, which 
emerge from the anterior border of the pons, and di- 
verge as they pass forward and outward to enter the 
under part of either hemisphere. Each crus is about 
three-quarters of an inch in length, and somewhat 
broader in front than behind. They are marked upon 
their surface with longitudinal striae, and each is 
crossed, just before entering the hemisphere, by a flat- 
tened white band, the optic tract, which is adherent by 



Anatomy. 1 1 1 

its upper border to the peduncle. In the anterior of 
the crura is contained a mass of dark, gray matter, 
called locus niger. The third nerves may be seen 
emerging from the inner side of either crus; and the 
fourth nerve winding around its outer side from above. 
Each crus consists of a superficial and deep layer of 
longitudinal white fibers, continued upward from the 
pons; these layers are separated from each other by 
the locus niger. 

The superficial longitudinal fibers are continued up- 
ward, from the anterior pyramids to the cerebrum. 
They consist of coarse fasciculi, which form the free 
part of the crus, and have received the name of the 
fasciculated portion of the peduncle, or crust. 

The deep layer of longitudinal fibers are con- 
tinued upward, to the cerebrum from the lateral 
posterior columns of the medulla, and from the olivary 
fasciculus, these fibers consisting of some derived from 
the same, and others from the opposite lateral tract 
of the medulla. More deeply are a layer of fine fibers, 
mixed with a gray matter derived from the cerebellum, 
blended with the former. The cerebral surface of the 
crus cerebri is formed of these fibers, and is named 
the tegmentum. 

The locus niger is a mass of gray matter, situated 
between the superficial and deep layer of fibers above 
described. It is placed nearer the inner than the outer 
side of the crus. 

The posterior lobes of the cerebrum are concealed 
from view by the upper surface of the cerebellum and 
pons Varolii. When these parts are removed, the two 



ii2 The Unknown Made Known. 

hemispheres are seen to be separated by the great longi- 
tudinal fissure, this fissure being interrupted, in front, 
by the posterior rounded border of the corpus callosum. 

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE PARTS COMPOSING THE 
CEREBRUM. 

As the peduncles of the cerebrum enter the hemi- 
spheres, they diverge from one another, so as to leave 
an interval between them, the interpeduncular space. 
As they ascend, the component fibers of each pass 
through two large masses of gray matter, the ganglia 
of the brain, called the thalamus opticus and corpus 
striatum, which project as rounded eminences from 
the upper and inner side of each peduncle. The hemi- 
spheres are connected together above these masses 
by the great transverse commissure, the corpus callo- 
sum, and the interval left between its under surface, 
the upper surface of the ganglia, and the parts closing 
the interpeduncular space, forms the general ventricu- 
lar cavity. The upper part of this cavity is subdivided 
into two, by a vertical septum, the septum lucidum; 
and thus the two lateral ventricles are formed. The 
lower part of the cavity forms the third ventricle, which 
communicates with the lateral ventricles, above, and 
with the fourth ventricle, behind. The fifth ventricle 
is the interval left between the two layers composing 
the septum lucidum. 

INTERIOR OF THE CEREBRUM. 

If the upper part of either hemisphere is removed 
with a scalpel, about half an inch above the level of 



Anatomy. 113 

the corpus callosum, its internal white matter will be 
exposed. It is an oval-shaped center, of white sub- 
stance, surrounded on all sides by a narrow, convo- 
luted margin of gray matter which presents an equal 
thickness in nearly every part. This white central mass 
has been called the centrum ovale minus. Its surface 
is studded with numerous minute red dots (puncta 
vasculosa) , produced by the escape of blood from di- 
vided blood vessels. In inflammation, or great- con- 
gestion of the brain, these are very numerous, and of 
a dark color. If the remaining portion of one hemi- 
sphere is slightly separated from the other, a broad 
band of white substance will be observed connecting 
them, at the bottom of the longitudinal fissure: this 
is the corpus callosum. The margins of the hemi- 
spheres, which overlap this portion of the brain, are 
called the labia cerebri. Each labium of the convo- 
lution of the corpus callosum {gyrus fornicatus), al- 
ready described; and the space between it and the up- 
per surface of the corpus callosum, has been termed 
the ventricle of the corpus callosum. 

The hemispheres should now be sliced off, to a 
level with the corpus callosum, when the white sub- 
stance of that structure will be seen connecting to- 
gether both hemispheres. The large expanse of 
medullary matter now exposed, surrounded by the con- 
voluted margin of gray substance, is called the centrum 
ovale ma jus of Vieussens. 

The corpus callosum is a thick stratum of transverse 
fibers, exposed at the bottom of the longitudinal fis- 
sure. It connects the two hemispheres of the brain, 



ii4 The Unknown Made Known. 

forming the great transverse commissure; and forms 
the roof of a space in the interior of each hemisphere, 
the lateral ventricle. It is about four inches in length, 
extending to within an inch and a half of the anterior, 
and to within two inches and a half of the posterior 
part of the brain. It is somewhat broader behind than 
in front, and is thicker at either end than in its cen- 
tral part, being thickest behind. It presents a some- 
what arched form from before backward, terminating 
anteriorly in a rounded border, which curves down- 
ward and backward, between the anterior lobes to the 
base of the brain. In its course it forms a distinct 
bend, named the knee or genu, and the reflected por- 
tion, named the beak (rostrum) , becoming gradually 
narrower, is attached to the anterior lobe, and is con- 
nected through the lamina cinerea with the optic com- 
missure. The reflected portion of the corpus callosum 
gives off, near its termination, two bundles of white 
substance, which, diverging from one another, pass 
backward, across the anterior perforated space to the 
entrance of the fissure of Sylvius. They are called 
the peduncles of the corpus callosum. Posteriorly the 
corpus callosum forms a thick, rounded fold, which is 
free for a little distance, as it curves forward, and is 
then continuous with the fornix. On its upper surface 
its fibrous structure is very apparent to the naked eye, 
being collected into coarse, transverse bundles. Along 
the middle line is a linear depression, the raphe, 
bounded laterally by two or more slightly elevated 
longitudinal bands, called the s trice longitudinales or 
nerves of Lancisi; and, still more externally, other 



Anatomy. 115 

longitudinal striae are seen, beneath the convolutions 
which rest on the corpus callosum. These are the 
strice longitudinal laterales. The under surface of the 
corpus callosum is continuous behind with the fornix, 
being separated from it in front by the septum lucidum, 
which forms a vertical partition between the two ven- 
tricles. On either side, the fibers of the corpus cal- 
losum penetrate into the substance of the hemispheres, 
and connect together the anterior, middle, and part 
of the posterior lobes. It is the large number of fibers 
derived from the anterior arid posterior lobes which 
explains the great thickness of the two extremities of 
this commissure. 

The lateral ventricles are serous cavities, formed by 
the upper part of the general ventricular space in the 
interior of the brain. They are lined by a thin dia- 
phragmous lining membrane, covered with ciliated epi- 
thelium, and moistened by a serous fluid, which is some- 
times, even in health, secreted in considerable quantity. 
These cavities are two in number, one in each hemi- 
sphere, and they are separated from each other by a 
vertical septum, the septum lucidum. 

Each lateral ventricle consists of a central cavity, or 
body, and three smaller cavities or cornua, which ex- 
tend from it in different directions. The anterior cornu 
curves forward and outward, into the substance of the 
anterior lobe. The posterior cornu is called the digital 
cavity, curves backward into the posterior lobe. The 
middle cornu descends into the middle lobe. 

The central cavity, or body of the lateral ventricle, 
is triangular in form. It is bounded, above by the 



n6 The Unknown Made Known. 

under surface of the corpus callosum, which forms the 
roof of the cavity. Internally is a vertical partition, 
the septum lucidum, which separates it from the op- 
posite ventricle, and connects the under surface of the 
corpus callosum with the fornix. Its floor is formed 
of the following parts, enumerated in the order of 
position from before backward: the corpus striatum, 
taenia semicircularis, thalamus opticus, choroid plexus, 
corpus fimbriatum, and fornix. 

The anterior cornu is triangular in form, passing 
outward into the anterior lobe, and curved round the 
anterior extremity of the corpus striatum. It is 
bounded above and in front by the corpus callosum; 
behind by the corpus striatum. 

The posterior cornu, or digital cavity, curves back- 
wards into the substance of the posterior lobe, its direc- 
tion being backward and outward, and then inward. 
On its floor is seen a longitudinal eminence, which cor- 
responds with a deep sulcus, between two convolutions ; 
this is called the hippocampus minor. Between the 
middle and posterior horns a smooth eminence is ob- 
served, which varies considerably in size in different 
subjects. It is called the eminencia collateralis. 

The corpus striatum has received its name from the 
striped appearance which its section presents, in con- 
sequence of diverging white fibers being mixed with 
the gray matter which forms the greater part of its sub- 
stance. The intraventricular portion is a large pear- 
shaped mass, of a gray color externally ; its broad ex- 
tremity is directed forward, into the fore part of the 
body and anterior cornu of the lateral ventricle. Its 



Anatomy. 1 1 7 

narrow end is directed outward and backward, being 
separated from its fellow by the thalami optici. It is 
covered by the serous lining of the cavity, and crossed 
by some veins of considerable size. The extraventric- 
ular portion is imbedded in the white substance of the 
hemisphere. 

The taenia semicircular is is a narrow, whitish, semi- 
transparent band of medullary substance, situated in the 
depression between the corpus striatum and thalamus 
opticus. Anteriorly, it descends in connection with the 
anterior pillar of the fornix ; behind, it is continued into 
the descending horn of the ventricle, where it becomes 
lost. Its surface, especially at is fore part, is transpar- 
ent, and dense in structure, and this was called by Tar- 
inus the horny band. It consists of longitudinal white 
fibers, the deepest of which run between the corpus 
striatum and thalamus opticus. Beneath it is a large 
vein {vena corporis striati) which receives numerous 
smaller veins from the surface of the corpus striatum 
and opticus thalamus, and joins the venae Galeni. 

The choroid plexus is a highly vascular, fringe-like 
membrane occupying the margin of the fold of pia 
mater (velum interpositum) in the interior of the 
brain. It extends in a curved direction across the floor 
of the lateral ventricle. In front, where it is small and 
tapering, it communicates with the choroid plexus of 
the opposite side through a large oval aperture, the 
foramen of Monro. Posteriorly, it descends into the 
middle horn of the lateral ventricle, where it joins with 
the pia mater through the transverse fissure. In struc- 
ture, it consists of highly vascular villous processes, 



n8 The Unknown Made Known. 

the villi being covered by a single layer of epithelium, 
composed of large, round corpuscles, containing, be- 
sides a central nucleus, a bright yellow spot. The ar- 
teries of the choroid plexus enter the ventricle at the 
descending cornu, and after ramifying through its sub- 
stance, send branches into the substance of the brain. 
The veins of the choroid plexus terminate in the venae 
Galeni. The corpus Umbriatum atcenia hippocampi 
is a narrow, white, tape-like band, situated immedi- 
ately behind the choroid plexus. It is the lateral edge 
of the posterior pillar of the fornix, and is attached 
along the inner border of the hippocampus major as it 
descends into the middle horn of the lateral ventricle. 
It may be traced as far as the pes hippocampi. 

The thalami optici and fornix will be described when 
more completely exposed, in a later stage of the dis- 
section of the brain. 

The middle, or descending cornu, the largest of the 
three, transverses the middle lobe of the brain, forming 
in its course a remarkable curve round the back of the 
optic thalamus. It passes at first, backward, outward 
and downward, and then curves round the crus cerebri, 
forward and inward, nearly to the point of the middle 
lobe, close to the fissure of Sylvius. Its upper boundary 
is formed by the medullary substance of the middle 
lobe, and the under surface of the thalamus opticus. 
Its lower boundary, or floor, presents for examination 
the following parts : The hippocampus major, pes hip- 
pocampi, pes accessorius, corpus fimbriatum, choroid 
plexus, fascia dentata, transverse fissure. 

The hippocampus major, or cornu Ammonis, so 



Anatomy. 119 

called from its resemblance to a ram's horn, is a white 
eminence, of a curved elongated form, extending along 
the entire length of the floor of the middle horn of the 
lateral ventricle. At its lower extremity it becomes en- 
larged, and presents a number of rounded elevations 
with intervening depressions, which, from presenting 
some resemblance to the paw of an animal, is called 
pes hippocampi. If a transverse section is made 
through the hippocampus major, it will be seen 
that this eminence is the inner surface of the 
convolution of the corpus callosum, doubled upon 
itself, like a horn, the white convex portion projecting 
into the cavity of the ventricle ; the gray portion being 
on the surface of the cerebrum, the edge of which, 
slightly indented, forms the fascia dentata. The 
white matter of the hippocampus major is continuous 
through the corpus fimbriatum, with the fornix and 
corpus callosum. 

The pes accessorius or eminencia collateralis, has 
been already mentioned, as a white eminence, varying 
in size, placed between the hippocampus major and 
minor, at the junction of the posterior with the de- 
scending cornu. Like the hippocampi, it is formed of 
white matter corresponding to one of the sulci, between 
two convolutions protruding into the cavity of the 
ventricle. 

The corpus fimbriatum is a continuation of the poste- 
rior pillar of the fornix, prolonged, as already men- 
tioned, from the central cavity to the lateral ventricle. 

Fascia dentata. On separating the inner border of 
the corpus fimbriatum from the choroid plexus, and 



120 The Unknown Made Known. 

raising the edge of the former, a serrated band of gray 
substance of the middle lobe will be seen beneath it; 
this is the fascia dentata. Correctly speaking, it is 
placed external to the cavity of the descending cornu. 

The transverse fissure is seen on separating the cor- 
pus fimbriatum from the thalamus opticus. It is situ- 
ated beneath the fornix, extending from the middle line 
behind, downward on either side, to the end of the 
descending cornu, being bounded on one side by the 
fornix and hemisphere and on the other by the thala- 
mus opticus. Through this fissure the pia mater passes 
from the exterior of the brain into the ventricles, to 
form the choroid plexus. Where the pia mater projects 
into the lateral ventricle, beneath the edge of the for- 
nix, it is covered by a prolongation of the lining mem- 
brane, which excludes it from the cavity. 

The septum lucidum forms the internal boundary of 
the lateral ventricle. It is a thin, transparent septum, 
attached, above, to the under surface of the corpus cal- 
losum ; below, to the anterior part of the fornix, and, in 
front of this, to the prolonged portion of the corpus 
callosum. It is triangular in form, broad in front, and 
narrow behind, its surfaces looking towards the cavities 
of the ventricles. The septum consists of two laminae, 
separated by a narrow interval, the fifth ventricle. 

Fifth Ventricle. Each lamina of the septum lucidum 
consists of an interval layer of white substance, covered 
by the lining membrane of the fifth ventricle, and an 
outer layer of gray matter, covered by the lining mem- 
brane of the lateral ventricle. The cavity of the fifth 
ventricle is lined by a serous membrane, covered with 



Anatomy. 121 

epithelium, and contains fluid. In the fetus, and in 
some animals, this cavity communicates below with the 
third ventricle; but in the adult it forms a separate 
cavity. In cases of serous effusion into the ventricles, 
the septum is often softened and partially broken down. 

The fornix is a longitudinal lamina of white fibrous 
matter, situated beneath the" corpus callosum, with 
which it is continuous behind, but separated from it in 
front by the septum lucidum. It may be described as 
two symmetrical halves, one for either hemisphere. 
These two portions are joined together in the middle 
line, where they form the body, but are separated from 
one another in front and behind, forming the anterior 
and posterior crura. 

The body of the fornix is triangular ; narrow in front, 
broad behind. Its upper surface is connected, in the me- 
dian line, to the septum lucidum in front, and to the 
corpus callosum behind. Its under surface rests upon 
the velum inter positum, which separates it from the 
third ventricle and the inner portion of the optic thai- 
ami. Its lateral edges form, on each side, part of the 
floor of the lateral ventricle, and are in contact with the 
choroid plexuses. 

The anterior crura arch downward toward the base 
of the brain, separated from each other by a narrow 
interval. They are composed of white fibers, which 
descend through a quantity of gray matter in the lateral 
walls of the third ventricle, and are placed immediately 
behind the anterior commissure. At the base of the 
brain, the white fibers of each crus form a sudden curve 
upon themselves, spread out and form the outer part of 



122 The Unknown Made Known. 

the corresponding corpus albicans, from which point 
they may be traced upward into the substance of the 
corresponding thalamus opticus. The anterior crura of 
the fornix are connected in their course with the optic 
commissure, the white fibers covering the optic thala- 
mus, the peduncle for the pineal gland, and the super- 
ficial fibres of the tsenia semicircularis. 

The posterior crura, at their commencement, are 
intimately connected by their upper surface with the 
corpus callosum ; diverging from one another, they pass 
downward into the descending horn of the lateral ven- 
tricle, being continuous with the concave border of 
the hippocampus major. The lateral thin edges of the 
posterior crura have received the name corpus fimbria- 
tum, already described. On the under surface of the 
fornix, toward its posterior part, between the diverging 
posterior crura, may be seen some transverse lines and 
others longitudinal or oblique. This appearance has 
been termed the lyra from the fanciful resemblance it 
bears to the strings of a harp. 

Between the anterior pillars of the fornix and the 
anterior extremities of the thalami optici, an oval aper- 
ture is seen on each side, the foramen of Monro. The 
two openings descend toward the middle line, and join- 
ing together lead into the upper part of the third ven- 
tricle. These openings communicate with the lateral 
ventricles on each side, and below with the third ven- 
tricle. 

The velum inter positam is a vascular membrane, 
reflected from the pia mater into the interior of the 
brain through the transverse fissure, passing beneath 



Anatomy. 123 

the posterior rounded border of the corpus callosum 
and fornix, and above the corpora quadrigemina, pineal 
gland, and optic thalami. It is of a triangular form, 
and separates the under surface of the body of the 
fornix from the cavity of the third ventricle. Its pos- 
terior border forms an almost complete investment 
for the pineal gland. Its anterior extremity, or apex, 
is bifed ; each bifurication being continued into the cor- 
responding lateral ventricle, behind the anterior crura 
of the fornix, forming the anterior extremity of the 
choroid plexus. On its under surface are two vascular 
fringes, which diverge from each other behind, and 
project into the cavity of the third ventricle. These are 
the choroid plexus of the third ventricle. To its lateral 
margins are connected the choroid plexus of the lat- 
eral ventricle. The arteries of the velum interpositum 
enter from behind, beneath the corpus callosum. Its 
veins, the venae Galeni, -two in number, run along its 
under surface; they are formed by the venae corporis 
striati and the veins of the choroid plexuses ; the venae 
Galeni unite posteriorly into a single trunk, which 
terminates in the straight sinus. 

The thalami optici are two large oblong masses, 
placed between the diverging portions of the corpora 
striata; they are of a white color superficially; intern- 
ally they are composed of white fibers intermixed with 
gray matter. Each thalamus rests upon its correspond- 
ing crus cerebri, which it embraces. 

Externally, it is bounded by the corpus striatum, and 
taenia semicircularis ; and is continuous with the hemi- 
sphere. Internally, it forms the lateral boundary of the 



124 The Unknown Made Known. 

third ventricle; and running along its upper border is 
seen the peduncle of the pineal gland. Its upper sur- 
face is free, being seen in the lateral ventricle ; it is 
partly covered by the fornix, and marked in front by 
an eminence, the anterior tubercle. Its under surface 
forms the roof of the descending cornu of the lateral 
ventricle; into it the crus cerebri passes. Its posterior 
and inferior part, which projects into the descending 
horn of the lateral ventricle, presents two small round 
eminences, the internal and external geniculate bodies. 
Its posterior extremity, which is narrow, forms the pos- 
terior boundary of the foramen of Monro. 

The third ventricle is the narrow oblong fissure 
placed between the thalami optici, and extending to 
the base of the brain. It is bounded, above, by the 
under surface of the velum interpositum, from which 
are suspended the choroid plexus of the third ventricle ; 
and latterly, by two white tracts, one on either side, the 
peduncles of the pineal gland. Its floor, somewhat 
oblique in its direction, is formed, from before back- 
ward, by the parts which close the interpeduncular 
space, viz.: the lamina cinera, the tuber cinereum and 
infundibulum, the corpora albicantia, and the locus 
perforatus posticus ; its sides, by the optic thalami ; it is 
bounded, in front, by the anterior crura of the fornix, 
and part of the anterior commissure; behind, by the 
posterior commissure, and the iter a tertio ad quart uin 
ventriculum. 

The cavity of the third ventricle is crossed by three 
commissures, named, from their position, anterior, 
middle, and posterior. 



Anatomy. 125 

The anterior commissure is a rounded cord of white 
fibers, placed in front of the anterior crura of the for- 
nix. It perforates the corpus striatum on either side, 
and spreads out into the substance of the hemispheres, 
over the roof of the descending horn of each lateral 
ventricle. 

The middle or soft commissure consists almost en- 
tirely of gray matter. It connects together the thalami 
optici, and is continuous with the gray matter lining 
the anterior part of the third ventricle. It is fre- 
quently broken in examining the brain, and might then 
be supposed to have been wanting. 

The posterior commissure, smaller than the anterior, 
is a flattened white band of fibers, connecting together 
the two thalami optici posteriorly. It bounds the third 
ventricle posteriorly, and is placed in front of and be- 
neath the pineal gland, above the opening leading to 
the fourth ventricle. 

The third ventricle has four openings connected with 
it. In front are the two oval apertures of the foramen 
of Monro, one on either side, through which the third 
communicates with the lateral ventricles. Behind is a 
third opening leading into the fourth ventricle by a 
canal, the aqueduct of Sylvius, or iter a tertio ad quar- 
tum ventriculum. The fourth, situated in the ante- 
rior part of the floor of the ventricle, is a deep pit, 
which leads downward to the funnel-shaped cavity of 
the infundibulum (iter ad infundibulum) . 

The lining membrane of the lateral ventricles is con- 
tinued through the foramen of Monro, into the third 
ventricle, and extends along the iter a tertio into the 



126 The Unknown Made Known. 

fourth ventricle ; at the bottom of the iter ad inf undib- 
ulum it ends in a cul-de-sac. 

Gray matter of the third ventricle. A layer of gray 
matter covers the greater part of the surface of the 
third ventricle. In the floor of this cavity it exists in 
grear abundance, and is prolonged upward on the 
sides of the thalami, extending across the cavity as the 
soft commissure ; below, it enters into the corpora albi- 
cantia, and surrounds in part the anterior pillars of the 
fornix. 

Behind the third ventricle, and in front of the cere- 
bellum, are the corpora quadrigemia ; and resting upon 
these, the pineal gland. 

The pineal gland (conarium) , so named from its 
peculiar shape (pinus, a fir-cone), is a small reddish 
gray body, conical in form, placed immediately behind 
the posterior commissure, and between the nates, upon 
which it rests. It is retained in its position by a dupli- 
cature of pia mater, derived from the under surface of 
the velum interpositum, which almost completely in- 
vests it. The pineal gland is about four lines in length, 
and from two to three in width at its base, and is said 
to be larger in the child than in the adult, and in the 
female than in the male. Its base is connected with 
the cerebrum by some transverse commissural fibers, 
derived from the posterior commissure; and by four 
slender peduncles, formed of medullary fibers. Of 
these the two superior pass forward upon the upper 
and inner margin of the optic thalami to the anterior 
crura of the fornix, with which they become blended. 
The inferior peduncles pass vertically downwards from 



Anatomy. 127 

the base of the pineal gland, along the back part of the 
inner surface of the thalami, and are only seen on a 
ventricle section through the gland. The pineal gland 
is very vascular, and consists chiefly of gray matter, 
with a few medullary fibers. In its base is a small 
cavity, said by some to communicate with that of the 
third ventricle. It contains a transparent viscid fluid, 
and occasionally a quantity of sabulous matter, named 
acervalus cerebri, composed of phosphate and carbon- 
ate of lime, phosphate of magnesia and ammonia, with 
a little animal matter. These concretions are almost 
constant in their existence, and are found at all periods 
of life. When this body is solid, the sabulous matter 
is found upon its surface, and occasionally upon its 
peduncles. 

The corpora or tuber cula quadrigemina (optic lobes) 
are four rounded eminences placed in pairs, two in 
front, and two behind, and separated from one another 
by a crucial depression. They are situated immediately 
behind the third ventricle and posterior commissure, 
beneath the posterior border of the corpus callosum, 
and above the iter a tertio ad quartum ventriculum. 
The anterior pair, the nates, are the larger, oblong 
from before backward, and of a gray color. 

The posterior pair, the testes, are hemispherical in 
form, and lighter in color than the preceding. They 
are connected on each side with the thalamus opticus, 
and commencement of the optic tracts, by means of 
two white prominent bands, termed brachia. Those 
connecting the nates with the thalamus (brachia an- 
terior a) are the larger, and pass obliquely outwards. 



128 The Unknown Made Known. 

Those connecting the testes with the thalamus, are 
called the brachia posteriora. Both pairs, in the adult, 
are quite solid, being composed of white matter ex- 
ternally, and gray matter within. These bodies are 
larger in the lower animals than in man. In fishes, 
reptiles, and in birds, they are only two in number, and 
are called the optic lobes, from their connection with 
the optic nerves, and are hollow in their interior ; but in 
mammalia, they are four in number, as in man, and 
quite solid. In the human fetus, they are developed at 
a very early period, and form a large proportion of the 
cerebral mass; at first, they are only two in number, 
as in the lower mammalia, and hollow in their interior. 

These bodies receive, from below, white fibers from 
the olivary fasciculus or fillet; they are also connected 
with the cerebellum, by means of a large white cord 
on each side, the processus ad testes, or superior pedun- 
cles of the cerebellum, which pass up to the thalami 
from the tubercula quadrigemina. 

The valve of Vieussens is a thin translucent lamina 
of medullary substance, stretched between the two 
processus cerebello ad testes; it covers in the canal 
leading from the third to the fourth ventricle, forming 
part of the roof of the latter cavity. It is narrow in 
front, where it is* connected with the testes; and 
broader behind, at its connection with the vermiform 
process of the cerebellum. A slight elevated ridge, the 
frenulum, descends upon the upper part of the valve 
from the corpora quadrigemina, and on either side of 
it may be seen the fibers of origin of the fourth nerve. 
Its lower half is covered by a thin transversely grooved 






Anatomy. 129 

lobule of gray matter prolonged from the anterior bor- 
der of the cerebellum; this is called by the Italian 
anatomists the linguetta laminosa. 

The corpora genie id at a are two small flattened, ob- 
long masses, placed on the outer side of the corpora 
quadrigemina, and on the under and back part of each 
optic thalamus, and named from their position, corpus 
gcniculatum externum and internum. They are placed 
one on the outer, and one on the inner side of each 
optic tract. In this situation, the optic tract may be 
seen dividing into two bands, one of which is connected 
with the external geniculate body and nates, the other 
being connected with the internal geniculate body and 
testis. 

Structure of the Cerebrum. — The white matter of 
each hemisphere consists of three kinds of fibers. 1. 
Diverging or peduncular fibers, which connect the 
hemisphere with the cord and medulla oblongata. 2. 
Transverse commissural fibers, which connect to- 
gether the two hemispheres. 3. Longitudinal commis- 
sural fibers, which connect distant parts of the same 
hemisphere. 

The diverging or peduncular fibers consist of a main 
body, and of certain accessory fibers. The main body 
originate in the columns of the cord and medulla ob- 
longata, and enter the cerebrum through the crus 
cerebri, where they are arranged in two bundles, sepa- 
rated by the locus niger. Those fibers which form the 
inferior and fasciculated portion of the crus, are de- 
rived from the anterior pyramid, and, ascending, pass 
mainly through the center of the striated body; those 



130 The Unknown Made Known. 

on the opposite surface of the crus, which form the 
tegmentum, are derived from the posterior pyramid 
and fasciculi teretes; as they ascend, they pass, some 
through the under part of the thalamus, and others 
through both thalamus and corpus striatum, decussat- 
ing in these bodies with each other, and with the fibers 
of the corpus callosum. The optic thalami also re- 
ceives accessory fibers from the processus ad testes, 
the olivary fasciculus, the corpora quadrigemina, and 
corpora geniculata. Some of the diverging fibers end 
in the cerebral ganglia, whilst others pass through and 
receive additional fibers from them, and as they emerge, 
radiate into the interior, middle, and posterior lobes of 
the hemispheres, decussating again with the fibers of 
the corpus callosum, before passing to the convolu- 
tions. These fibers have received the name of corona 
radiata. 

The transverse commissural fibers connect together 
the two hemispheres across the middle line. They are 
formed by the corpus callosum, and the anterior and 
posterior commissures. 

The longitudinal commissural -fibers connect together 
different parts of the same hemisphere, the fibers being 
disposed in a longitudinal direction, they form the for- 
nix, the taenia semicircularis, and peduncles of the 
pineal gland, the striae longitudinales, the fibers of the 
gyrus fornicatus, and fasciculus unciformis. 

THE CEREBELLUM. 

The cerebellum, or little brain, is that portion of the 
encephalon which is contained in the inferior occipital 



Anatomy. 1 3 1 

fossae. It is situated beneath the posterior lobes of the 
cerebrum, from which it is separated by the tentorium. 
Its average weight in the male is 5 oz. 4 drs. It at- 
tains its maximum weight between the twenty-fifth 
and fortieth year. It consists of gray and white 
matter: the former darker than that of the cerebrum, 
occupies the surface; the latter the interior. The sur- 
face of the cerebellum is not convoluted like the cere- 
brum, but traversed by numerous curved furrows or 
sulci, which vary in depth in different parts, and sepa- 
rates the laminae of which its exterior is composed. / 
Its upper surface is somewhat elevated in the median 
line, and depressed towards its circumference; it con- 
sists of two lateral hemispheres, connected together by 
an elevated median portion or lobe, the superior vermi- 
form process. The median lobe is the fundamental 
part, and in some animals, as fish and reptiles, the only 
part which exists ; the hemispheres being additions, 
and attaining their maximum size in man. The hemi- 
spheres are separated, in front, by a deep notch, the 
incisura cerebelli anterior, which encircles the corpora 
quadrigemina behind; they are also separated by a 
similar notch behind, the incisura cerebelli posterior, 
in which is received the upper part of the falx cerebelli. 
The superior vermiform process (upper part of the 
median lobe of the cerebellum) extends from the notch 
on the anterior to that on the posterior border. It is 
divided into three lobes : the lobulus centralis, a small 
lobe, situated in the incisura anterior; the monticulus 
cerebelli, the central projecting part of the process; 



132 The Unknown Made Known. 

and the commissura simplex, a small lobe near the 
incisura posterior. 

The under surface of the cerebellum is subdivided 
into two lateral hemispheres by a depression, or valley, 
receives the back part of the medulla oblongata, is 
broader in the center than at either extremity, and has, 
projecting from its floor, part of the median lobe of 
the cerebellum, called the inferior vermiform process. 
The parts entering into the composition of this body 
are, from behind forwards, the commissura brevis, 
situated in the incisura posterior; in front of this, a 
laminated conical projection, the pyramid; more an- 
teriorly, a larger eminence, the uvula, which is placed 
between the two rounded lobes which occupy the sides 
of the valley, the amygdala or tonsils, and is connected 
with them by a commissure of gray matter, indented on 
the surface, called the furrowed band. In front of the 
uvula is the nodule; it is the anterior pointed termina- 
tion of the inferior vermiform process, and projects 
into the cavity of the fourth ventricle; it has been 
named by Malacarne the laminated tubercle. On each 
side of the nodule is a thin layer of white substance, 
attached externally to the flocculus, and internally to 
the nodule ; these form together the posterior medullary 
velum, or commissure of the flocculus. It is usually 
covered in and concealed by the amygdalae, and cannot 
be seen until they are drawn aside. This band is of 
a semi-lunar form on each side, its anterior margin 
being free and concave, its posterior attached just in 
front of the furrowed band. Between it and the 



Anatomy. 133 

nodulus and uvula behind, is a deep fossa, called the 
swallow's nest (nidus hirundinus). 

Lobes of the cerebellum. Each hemisphere is di- 
vided into an upper and a lower portion by the great 
horizontal fissure, which commences in front at the 
pons, and passes horizontally round the free margin 
of either hemisphere, backwards to the middle line. 
From this primary fissure numerous secondary fissures 
proceed, which separate the cerebellum into lobes. 

Upon the upper surface of either hemisphere there 
are two lobes, separated from each other by a fissure. 
These are the anterior or square lobe, which extends 
as far back as the posterior edge of the vermiform 
process, and the posterior or semilunar lobe, which 
passes from the termination of the preceding to the 
great horizontal fissure. 

Upon the under surface of either hemisphere there 
are five lobes, separated by sulci ; these are from before 
backwards. The flocculus or sub-peduncular lobe, a 
prominent tuft, situated behind and below the middle 
peduncle of the cerebellum ; its surface is composed of 
gray matter, subdivided into a few small laminae ; it is 
sometimes called the pneumo gastric lobule, from being 
situated behind the pneumogastric nerve. The amyg- 
dala or tonsil is situated on either side of the great me- 
dian fissure or valley, and projects into the fourth ven- 
tricle. The digastric lobe is situated on the outside of 
the tonsil, being connected in part with the pyramid. 
Behind the digastric is the slender lobe, which is con- 
nected with the back part of the pyramid and the com- 
missura brevis; and more posteriorly is the inferior 



134 The Unknown Made Known. 

posterior lobe, which also joins the commissura brevis 
in the valley. 

Structure. If a vertical section is made through 
either hemisphere of the cerebellum, midway between 
its center and the superior vermiform process, the in- 
terior will be found to consist of a central stem of white 
matter, which contains in its interior a dentate body. 
From the surface of this central stem, a series of plates 
of medullary matter are detached, which, covered with 
gray matter, form the laminae; and from the anterior 
part of each hemisphere arise three large processes 
or peduncles, superior, middle, and inferior, by which 
the cerebellum is connected with the rest of the enceph- 
alon. 

The lamince are about ten or twelve in number, in- 
cluding those on both surfaces of the cerebellum, those 
in front being detached at a right angle, and those be- 
hind at an acute angle; as each lamina proceeds out- 
wards, other secondary laminae are detached from it, 
and, from these, tertiary laminae. The arrangement 
thus described gives to the cut surface of the organ a 
foliated appearance, to which the name of arbor vitae 
has been given. Each lamina consists of white matter, 
covered externally by a layer of gray substance. The 
white matter of each lamina is derived partly from the 
central stem; in addition to which white fibers pass 
from one lamina to another. The gray matter resem- 
bles somewhat the cortical substance of the convolu- 
tions. It consists of two layers : the external one, soft 
and of a grayish color; the internal one, firmer, and 
of a rust color. 



Anatomy. 135 

The corpus dentatum, or ganglion of the cerebellum, 
is situated a little to the inner side of the center of the 
stem of white matter. It consists of an open bag or 
capsule of gray matter, the section of which presents 
a gray dentated outline, open at its anterior part. It 
is surrounded by white libers ; white fibers are also con- 
tained in its interior, which issue from it to join the 
superior peduncles. 

The peduncles of the cerebellum, superior, middle, 
and inferior, serve to connect it with the rest of the 
encephalon. 

The superior peduncles {processus e cerebello ad 
testes) connect the cerebellum with the cerebrum ; they 
pass forward and upwards to the testes, beneath which 
they ascend to the crura cerebri and optic thalami, 
forming part of the diverging cerebral fibers; each 
peduncle forms part of the lateral boundary of the 
fourth ventricle, and is connected with its fellow of the 
opposite side by the valve of Vieussens. The peduncles 
are continuous behind with the folia of the inferior 
vermiform process, and with the white fibers in the in- 
terior of the corpus dentatum. Beneath the corpora 
quadrigemina, the innermost fibers of each peduncle 
decussate with each other, so that some fibers from the 
right half of the cerebellum are continued to the left 
half of the cerebrum. 

The inferior peduncles {processus ad medullam) 
connects the cerebellum with the medulla oblongata. 
They pass downwards, to the back part of the medulla, 
and form part of the restiform bodies. Above, the 
fibers of each process are connected chiefly with the 



136 The Unknown Made Known. 

laminae, on the upper surface of the cerebellum; and 
below, they are connected with all three tracts of one- 
half of the medulla, and, through these, with the cor- 
responding half of the cord, excepting the posterior 
median columns. 

The middle peduncles (processus ad portem), the 
largest of the three, connect together the two hemi- 
spheres of the cerebellum, forming the great transverse 
commissure. They consist of a mass of curved fibers, 
which arise in the lateral parts of the cerebellum, and 
pass across to the same points on the opposite side. 
They form the transverse fibers of the pons Varolii. 

FOURTH VENTRICLE. 

The fourth ventricle, ventricle of the cerebellum, is 
the space between the posterior surface of the medulla 
oblongata and pons in front, and the cerebrum behind. 
It is lozenge-shaped, being contracted above and below, 
and broadest across its central part. It is bounded 
laterally by the processus e cerebello ad testes above, 
by the diverging posterior pyramids and restiform 
bodies below. 

The roof is arched; it is formed by the valve of 
Vieussens and the under surface of the cerebellum, 
which presents, in this situation, four small eminences 
or lobules, the nodules, uvula, and amygdalae. 

The anterior boundary, or floor, is formed by the 
posterior surface of the medulla oblongata and pons. 
In the median line is seen the posterior median fissure, 
which becomes gradually obliterated above, and ter- 



Anatomy. 137 

minates below in the point of the calamus scriptorius, 
formed by the convergence of the posterior pyramids. 
At this point is the orifice of a short canal terminating 
in a cul-de-sac, the remains of a canal which extends in 
foetal life through the center of the cord. On each side 
of the median fissure are two slightly convex longi- 
tudinal eminences, the fasciculi teretes ; they extend the 
entire length of the floor, being indistinct below and of 
a grayish color, but well marked and whitish above. 
Each eminence consists of fibers derived from the lat- 
eral tract and restiform body, which ascends to the 
cerebrum. Opposite the crus cerebelli, on the outer 
side of the fasciculi teretes, is a small eminence of dark 
gray substance, which presents a bluish tint through 
the thin stratum covering it ; this is called the taenia 
violacea. The lower part of the floor of the ventricle 
is crossed by several white transverse lines, linece 
transversa; they emerge from the posterior fissure; 
some enter the crus cerebelli, others enter the roots 
of origin of the auditory nerve, whilst some pass up- 
ward and outward on the floor of the ventricle. 

The lining membrane of the fourth ventricle is con- 
tinuous with that of the third, through the aqueduct 
of Sylvius, and its cavity communicates below with the 
sub-arachnoid space of the brain and cord through an 
aperture in the layer of pia mater extending between 
the cerebellum and medulla oblongata. Laterally, this 
membrane is reflected outward a short distance be- 
tween the cerebellum and medulla. 

The choroid plexuses of the fourth ventricle are two 
in number; they are delicate vascular fringes, which 
project into the ventricle on each side, passing from the 



138 The Unknown Made Known. 

point of the inferior vermiform process to the outer 
margin of the rectiform bodies. 

The gray matter in the floor of the ventricle consists 
of a tolerably thick stratum, continuous below with the 
gray commissure of the cord, and extending up as high 
as the aqueduct of Sylvius, besides some special de- 
posits connected with the roots of origin of certain 
nerves. In the upper half of the ventricle is a projec- 
tion situated over the nucleus, from which the sixth 
and facial nerves take a common origin. In the lower 
half are three eminences on each side for the roots of 
origin of the eighth and ninth nerves. 



CHAPTER IX. 

THOUGHT AND FORCE. 

In Chapter VII. we showed that conceptions on the 
brain, by light and sound, were caused by vibrations. 
It is clear that vibrations are caused by force. It is 
impossible to conceive of vibrations without a cause, 
and it is impossible to conceive of any cause that would 
produce such an effect other than force. This brings 
us face to face with the proposition that thought is 
produced by force, or in other words thought is active 
force, and as long as thought continues active force 
continues or exists. It is a well known law of physics 
that a body put in motion by force will continue in 
motion unless stopped by a counteracting force. We 
see this exemplified in the waves or vibrations of light 
passing through the luminiferous ether. It has been 
shown that the luminiferous ether offered no resist- 
ance to bodies passing through it, hence a wave of light, 
coming from a distant star, after over a thousand years 
of marvelously rapid flight, strikes the retina of the 
eye with undiminished force. When a wave of light 
strikes the lens of the eye, there is resistance offered in 
passing through the lens, this may be very slight, yet it 
is something ; the same may be said in passing through 
the vitreous humor, likewise in passing through the 
optic nerve and in making its impression upon the 



140 The Unknown Made Known. 

brain there is a continuous consumption of force, and 
were there no provision for reinforcement the. wave 
of light would become so weakened that it would be- 
come incompetent to make an impression upon the 
brain. But this has happily been provided for in the 
form of ganglia of gray matter in the optic nerve and 
the ganglia of the brain, which lies at its base, and in 
the gray matter in the convolutions. Now, if we are 
correct in the proposition that thought is the result of 
force, we are certainly justified in saying, thought is 
active force. Now, if thought is active force, we are 
justified in looking for some way by which thought 
force can be transferred to a material body and thus 
be made manifest to the senses. Let us see if we can, 
by a simple experiment, bring this fact out clearly to 
the comprehension of the understanding. Let the 
reader take a common pocket-knife and a piece of com- 
mon wrapping twine, about eighteen inches in length. 
Fold the twine, then shut the folded end in the knife; 
keep the ends of the twine together. Take hold of the 
two ends of the twine with the thumb and forefinger 
of each hand, let the forearms rest upon the outspread 
knees, hold steadily till the knife ceases to move. Then, 
looking steadily at the knife, over the hands, think in- 
tently that you want the knife to swing back and forth. 
Be careful not to exert any muscular force. Give the 
thought a kind of swing to correspond with the desired 
motion of the knife, as though the knife was really 
in motion and you were following it with the mind and 
eye, bearing in mind that thought force is very deli- 
cate, and any experiment with thought force must be 






Thought and Force. 141 

carefully and delicately performed in order to get fav- 
orable results. Almost instantly the knife will begin to 
swing, pendulum like, in obedience to your thought. 
Now think that you want the knife to cease swinging 
back and forth and swing sidewise, again the knife 
will obey the thought. Now think that you want the 
knife to cease swinging sidewise and swing round and 
round ; again the knife will obey the thought. 

It may be said that this swinging motion is caused 
by an imperceptible muscular movement. To answer 
this let the reader take a common pendulum clock and 
set it on a table. Stop the clock perfectly still, then 
standing behind the clock rest both hands on the top 
of it, let the door be open, look at the pendulum stead- 
ily and wish it to commence swinging and the pendu- 
lum will slowly begin swinging. It will not swing as 
readily as the knife, because of the obstruction to the 
thought waves offered by the clock. To get the best 
results a little care should be taken to get the thought 
waves keyed with the swing of the pendulum. 

To get good results from the clock pendulum the 
clock should be "run down," so as to leave the pendu- 
lum absolutely free to swing. Thought force is very 
subtle, and a slight force or obstruction impedes its 
action. 

This certainly answers the muscular movement ob- 
jection. In the experiment with the knife, a certain 
length of string will be found to work best with each 
particular person; the string will act best when keyed 
to the thought waves. 
. There is no question but it requires force to cause 



142 The Unknown Made Known. 

the knife to swing. The operator can by careful and 
repeated trials, satisfy himself that there is no muscular 
action whatever to cause the knife to swing. Again, 
if the eyes are not fixed upon the knife it will not swing. 
Hold the knife still and look in some other direction 
and think intently as you may and the knife will not 
move till the eyes rest upon it. 

This brings out another principle or law of mental 
action, that, perhaps, it is best to notice here. TI12 
power of concentration, or direction, of thought. We 
all know that in order to get the full force and effect 
of what a speaker says, especially if he is a speaker of 
great force and power, we want to be so situated as to 
look him squarely in the eyes, and the speaker to have 
the greatest effect wants to look his hearers in the eye. 
In the case spoken of in a former chapter, of looking 
at some person's back and wishing that they would 
look around, we have a case of concentration and direc- 
tion of thought. If we wish them to look around as 
intently as we may, and not look at them, they will not 
heed our wish, but as soon as our eyes rest upon them 
they respond to our wish. But now comes the question, 
how does our mental desire that they should look 
round reach them and cause them to act? Simply in 
this way : we have demonstrated that thought is the 
result of force of vibrations, hence is the manifesta- 
tion of force, or more explicitly, thought is vibrations. 

We have shown in a former chapter that the most 
delicate or subtile substance or element in nature is 
the luminiferous ether, that pervades all space and all 
matter however solid. Now, thought being vibrations, 



Thought and Force. 143 

these thought vibrations are communicated or trans- 
ferred to the luminiferous ether present in the brain, 
and thus transferred or conveyed to the brain of the 
person to whom we have directed our thought, and they 
unconsciously obey the mandate of our will. This is 
mental telepathy, and operates precisely upon the same 
principle as wireless telegraphy which is now occupy- 
ing the attention of so many scientists. 

In connection with the phenomenon of thought con- 
centration or thought direction, there is another phe- 
nomenon that should be noticed here. We all know 
that there is a power or force in looking intently and 
earnestly at another by which we can have an influence 
upon them. What is this, and why is it ? We have seen 
a practical and experienced teacher look a refractory 
pupil into obedience without saying a word. He would 
first resist and then yield. There must be something 
that causes obedience. It is inconceivable that there 
can be an effect without a cause. Some may say, that 
is the influence of the eye. But that does not give a 
tangible reason or cause that the mind can grasp. Let 
us seek for something that the mind can grasp and 
satisfies the understanding. We have learned that in 
the nervous system there are two kinds of nerves, the 
motory and sensory. The sensory conveys information 
to the brain, the motory conveys mandates from the 
brain. Now, reasoning from analogy is it not reason- 
able to believe that the optic nerve is composed of two 
sets of nerves? One set carries information to the 
brain, the other set carries vibrations of thought from 
the brain; these vibrations of thought are transferred 



144 The Unknown Made Known. 

from the optic nerve extremities to the luminiferous 
ether, and thus conveyed to the person to whom they 
are directed. We do not say that this is the case. But 
from all the facts and circumstances that group around 
this phenomenon we see no escape from this conclu- 
sion. It certainly is logical and corresponds to analo- 
gous conditions in nature. In the experiment with the 
swinging knife, if the eyes are not fixed upon the knife 
it will not move. But as soon as the eyes rest upon the 
knife it at once begins to swing. In this experiment 
we cannot escape the conclusion that there is a subtile 
force that is in some way directed by the eye. It is 
hard to conceive of anything else but the vibrations of 
thought emanating from the eye. In like manner, in 
desiring one to look around, it is necessary to look in- 
tently at them, otherwise there is but slight probability 
that they will look around. They may become restless 
and uneasy, as is sometimes the case, but they cannot 
locate the cause till the eye rests upon them. This 
seems to be analogous to the law by which we locate 
the cause of sound. If sound is intercepted by a series 
of echoes all is confusion, there must be a straight 
shot to enable the ear to locate. 

The writer of this was at one time sitting at a writ- 
ing table at a hotel, at which was also sitting the editor 
of a paper, presumably writing an editorial. My eye 
accidentally fell upon his sheet, I could not read what 
he was writing, but I noticed he was writing a peculiar- 
ly round, bold, compact hand, and was admiring it. 
In less than a second he suddenly stopped and looked 
me squarely in the eye. The fact was that I was men- 



Thought and Force. 145 

tally disturbing him, and my eye revealed the source of 
the disturbance. 

Many of us have noticed this. When a person is 
sleeping quietly and restfully let some one quietly step 
up and look the sleeper steadily in the face and wish 
for the sleeper to wake up, in a very short time he 
will open his eyes and look the person standing by 
squarely in the face. Now if one sits down by the 
sleeper and wishes ever so hard for him to awake and 
not look at him he will not awake. In the first instance 
the thought vibrations of the person standing by are 
directed by his eye, and by reason of the fact that the 
soul of the sleeper is temporarily withdrawn from the 
active possession of the brain, the soul of the person 
standing by, by the agency of thought vibrations di- 
rected by the eye easily gets possession of the sleeper's 
brain and arouses it into activity. In the second in- 
stance the thought vibrations are not focused upon the 
sleeper's brain, yet the thought vibrations may have 
sufficient force and effect to cause restlessness and even 
dreams, but not wakefulness. Now these are facts 
and not theories that any one can verify by a little 
painstaking observation to his complete satisfaction. 

This gives a reasonable, logical, analogous explana- 
tion to this hitherto unexplained phenomenon. To 
say that there is a mysterious influence about the eye 
is dodging the question. It would be a hundredfold 
better to say, "I don't know anything about it." That 
would be a show of honesty if not of wisdom. We 
don't believe that the Creator of the universe is a 
juggler, who delights in bewildering his creatures with 



146 The Unknown Made Known. 

mysterious hallucinations. Webelieve that to ascribe 
hidden and mysterious doings to the Omnipotent is the 
basest sacrilege. 

We will now leave this analysis of the power of 
looking with the reader for what it is worth for the 
time being, and again take up the analysis of thought 
transference or telepathy, or the power of the mind 
or soul of one person to get possession of the brain 
of another and direct or control his thoughts in ordi- 
nary affairs. 

Telepathy and hypnotism are so nearly related that 
it is difficult to discuss the one without considering the 
other. Telepathy may exist without hypnotism, but 
hypnotism cannot exist without telepathy. 

Before taking up the analysis of telepathy, we will 
ask the reader to indulge us in a digression, in which 
we will discuss the different kinds of impressions we 
get upon the mind, and the different ways by which 
we get impressions or pictures upon the mind. 

Let us suppose that we look out on the landscape, 
and, as we say, see a house. As an abstract fact we 
do not see the house at all. We simply see a picture 
of the house. All know that the way we see the house 
is this ; the rays or waves of light fall upon the house 
and are reflected and fall upon the retina of the eye* 
and form a picture of the house which is conveyed or 
transferred to the invisible camera of the brain and 
there reproduced, and that the picture of the house is 
what we really see. If a photographer has his camera 
placed ready to take a picture of the house and we 
step up and raise the screen and look in the camera 



Thought and Force. 147 

we see the picture of the house on the plate or retina 
of the camera, this picture is transferred to the retina 
of the eye and then to the brain. We see the picture 
of the house in the brain just the same. All the camera 
does is to make one more picture. Again suppose we 
decide to build a house, we think the matter over till 
we form a picture of the house we propose to build, 
in the mind. We look at that mental picture and ad- 
mire it until it almost becomes real. It is a real picture. 
We look at the house on the landscape, then shut our 
eyes, we still see the picture of that house in the mind. 
Now there is not a particle of difference between the 
two pictures, save this; the picture of the house on 
the landscape is caused or produced by the vibrations 
of light as a means of forming a mental picture in the 
brain, the other picture is formed by the vibrations 
of thought, hence both pictures are formed by vibra- 
tions acting on the brain, and are in effect alike. We 
know that in dreams we see persons and places, or 
their pictures, so vividly that after we awake we re- 
member them as plainly as actual scenes of life. 

One thing more before we begin our telepathic, hyp- 
notic analysis. In a former chapter we referred to the 
fact that there was a something in the brain that acted 
as a monitor or director of thought, that will say : "Now 
quit thinking about this subject and think about some- 
thing else," or "quit this reckless roving around, think- 
ing lightly of so many foolish things, and get down to 
business and solve this problem." Or, in other words, 
there is a something, whose habitat is the brain, that 
has control and direction of the brain and its opera- 



148 The Unknown Made Known. 

tions. It is the real personality of our being, the soul, 
the ego. All are conscious of this fact, it needs no 
proof, it is self-evident. 

Now we are ready for our telepathic, hypnotic an- 
alysis. 

There are several different methods in vogue among 
hypnotists, we will consider the method of Bernheim 
only, called "Hypnotism by Suggestion." It is not our 
purpose to write a treatise on hypnotism, but to con- 
sider the scientific principles upon which they operate. 

When a hypnotist takes a subject to operate on, he 
first gets the consent of his subject to yield a willing 
and unquestioned obedience to his suggestions, other- 
wise it would be impossible for him to accomplish his 
purpose. Thus equipped he commences operations. 
Then in a soothing quiet monotone he tells his subject 
he is getting sleepy, tells him to think of going to sleep, 
tells him to think, while going to sleep of some old 
barn, think how dilapidated it looks, see how dilapidated 
the floor is, calls his attention to the rat holes in the 
floor. When the operator commences he has his sub- 
ject look him straight in the eye, the operator looking 
his subject steadily but firmly in the eye, approaching 
him nearer and nearer as he talks to him about the 
old barn and the rat holes. The hypnotist thinking 
steadily and intently about an old barn that he has 
pictured in his mind. In the mean time the hypnotist 
by means of the thought vibrations emanating from 
his eye, and the thought vibrations transferred through 
the luminiferous ether, has got possession of the brain 
of his subject. The soul or ego of the subject, as per 



Thought and Force. 149 

agreement, has temporarily withdrawn from actual con- 
trol of his brain. The soul or ego of the hypnotist, by 
means of thought transference, or thought vibrations, 
has control of his subject's brain and controls his 
thoughts. Whatever the hypnotist directs or suggests 
to his subject to think, that he thinks. Any mental pic- 
ture vividly drawn in the mind of the hypnotist is re- 
produced in the brain or mind of the subject. When 
the hypnotist gets his subject in this condition he says 
to him ; "Now open your eyes and see the rats coming 
up through the holes and running over the floor!" 
The subject opens his eyes, looks down toward the floor 
in great surprise and earnestness. He sees the rats 
coming up through the holes. The picture of crawl- 
ing rats is formed upon his mind by the suggestion of 
the operator, and to him it is a real picture of rats, just 
as real as the picture of the house on the landscape. 
The means are different but the result is precisely the 
same. The hypnotist now has his subject completely 
under his control. He now says to him; "See the rats 
running over the floor!" The subject draws himself 
up on his chair as if in fear of an attack. The hyp- 
notist now says in a quick lively tone; "See the rats 
are running up your pants!" The subject in great 
fright violently leaps to his feet and frantically tries to 
get the rats out of his pant-legs. 

In all this operation there is no mysterious influence 
or animal magnetism (whatever that may be), that 
passes over from the hypnotist to his subject. All such 
explanations are simply meaningless and bewildering 
without giving any rational or logical explanation. It 



150 The Unknown Made Known. 

is all done by telepathy or thought transference or 
thought vibrations of one mind passing through the 
luminiferous ether and impressing themselves upon 
the brain of another. Let us see if we can illustrate 
this thought. Suppose we are listening to an entertain- 
ing speaker who is discussing a subject of great inter- 
est to us. His argument and train of thought is agree- 
able to us. We listen to him with rapt attention. 
Our whole mind is occupied with what he is saying, 
we become oblivious to everything else. Our soul, or 
ego, has temporarily withdrawn from the direction or 
control of our mind. We are not perfecting any plans 
in our business, we are not engaged in solving any 
problem, we have for the time being given up our 
mind to the speaker, his thoughts become our thoughts. 
The prime cause of all this is the vibrations of his 
voice conveyed to our ears by means of the air, and 
by these vibrations impressions are made upon the 
brain or mind. There is also a sympathetic telepathy 
going on through the luminiferous ether, until there 
er will believe a false statement made by the speaker, 
this may be carried to such an extent that the hear- 
er will believe a false statement made by the speaker, 
at least for the time being. A speaker is always con- 
scious of the good reception of what he is saying by 
his hearers. If an audience is not in sympathy with 
the speaker in what he is saying, it is hard for him 
to talk. We have seen a noted and able speaker stop 
in the midst of a discourse and complain that it was 
hard for him to talk. The fact was, a majority of the 
audience were not in sympathy with the views he was 



Thought and Force. 151 

presenting, and this fact was conveyed to him by tele- 
pathy and oppressed him. Any one, with a little ob- 
servation, can tell, almost instantly, when he enters the 
company of others, whether his company is agreeable 
or not. Telepathy is a great tale teller, and when 
better understood will be a great revealer of purposes. 

Like all mental operations, the degrees and shades 
of hypnotism and telepathy are innumerable, ranging 
from the faintest trace to the most positive and direct 
communication. We will notice a few cases that come 
to us as well authenticated as any narrative can be. 

The following is taken from Dr. Osgood Mason's 
excellent work on "Telepathy and the Subliminal 
Self/' pp. 186-195. 

"A remarkable example of messages received by au- 
tomatic writing is that furnished by Mr. W. T. Stead, 
occurring in his own experience. Mr. Stead is a well- 
known author, journalist, and the editor of the London 
edition of the Review of Reviews, in which magazine 
his experiences have, on various occasions, been pub- 
lished. 

"As regards the matter, there is an invisible intelli- 
gence which controls his hand, but the persons with 
whom he is in communication are alive and visible — for 
instance, his own son on various occasions, also per- 
sons in his employ, writers upon his magazine, casual 
acquaintances, and even strangers. 

"None of the persons participate in any active or 
conscious way in the communications. Mr. F. W. H. 
Myres has often communicated with Mr. Stead and 
with several of his involuntary correspondents in re- 



152 The Unknown Made Known. 

lation to the phenomena, and the facts are so simple 
and open, and the persons connected with them so intel- 
ligent and evidently sincere and truthful, that no doubt 
can be entertained as to the reality of the incidents, 
however they may be interpreted. 

"One of the most remarkable of these involuntary 
correspondents is known as Miss A., a lady employed 
by him in literary work of an important character. 
She testifies in regard to this matter: 'I, the subject 
of Mr. Stead's automatic writing, known as "A.," tes- 
tify to the correctness of the statements made in this 
report. I would like to add what I think more wonder- 
ful than many things Mr. Stead has cited, namely — the 
correctness with which, on several occasions, he has 
given the names of persons whom he has never seen 
nor heard of before. I remember on one occasion a 
person calling upon me with a very uncommon name. 
The next day I saw Mr. Stead and he read to me what 
his hand had written of the visit of the person, giving 
the name absolutely correct. Mr. Stead had never seen 
the person and until then had no knowledge of his ex- 
istence.' " 

The following is a description of a journey made 
by Miss A., automatically written by Mr. Stead, he at 
the time not having the slightest knowledge where she 
was, what she was doing, or that she intended making 
any such a journey. The slight inaccuracies are noted : 
"I went to the Waterloo station by the twelve o'clock 
train, and got to Hampton Court about one. When we 
got out we went to a hotel and got dinner. It cost 
nearly three shillings. After dinner I went to the pic- 



Thought and Force. 153 

ture galleries. I was very much pleased with the 
paintings of many of the ceilings. I was interested in 
most of the portraits of Lely. After seeing the gal- 
leries I went into the grounds. How beautiful they 
are! I saw a great vine, that lovely English garden, 
the avenue of elms, the canal, the great water sheet, the 
three views, the fountain, the gold fishes, and then lost 
myself in the maze. I got home about nine o'clock. 
It cost me altogether about six shillings." On com- 
municating this to Miss A. she found that everything 
was correct with two exceptions. She went down by 
the two o'clock train instead of the twelve, and got to 
Hampton Court about three. The dinner cost her two 
and eleven pence, which was nearly three shillings, and 
the total amount was six and three pence. The places 
were visited in the order mentioned. 

A second instance was where the needs of a com- 
parative stranger were written out by Mr. Stead's 
hand. Mr. Stead goes on to say: "Last February I 
met a correspondent in a railway carriage with whom 
I had a very casual acquaintance. Knowing that he 
was in considerable distress, our conversation fell into 
a more or less confidential strain in which I divined 
that his difficulty was chiefly financial. I said I did 
not know whether I could be of any use to him, but 
asked him to let me know exactly how things stood — 
what were his debts, his expectations, and so forth. 
He said he really could not tell me, and I refrained 
from pressing him. 

"That night I received a letter from him apologizing 
for not having given the information, but saying he 



154 The Unknown Made Known. 

really could not. I received that letter about ten o'clock, 
and about two o'clock next morning, before going to 
sleep, I sat down in my bedroom and said : 'You did 
not like to tell me your exact financial condition face 
to face, but now you can do so through my hand. 
Just write and tell me how things stand. How much 
do you owe?' My hand wrote, 'My debts are io,o.' 
In answer to a further inquiry whether the figures were 
accurately stated, 'ninety pounds' was written in full. 
'Is that all?' I asked. My hand wrote, 'Yes, and how 
I am to pay I do not know.' 'Well,' I said; 'how 
much do you want for that piece of property you wish 
to sell?' My hand wrote 'What I hope is say £100 
for that. It seems a great deal, but I must get money 
somehow. Oh, if I could get anything to do — I would 
gladly do anything!' 'What does it cost you to live?' 
I asked. My hand wrote, 'I do not think I could pos- 
sibly live under £200 a year. If I were alone I could 
live on £50 per annum.' 

"The next day I made a point of seeking my friend. 
He said : 'I hope you were not offended at my refus- 
ing to tell you my circumstances, but really I do not 
think it would be right to trouble you with them.' I 
said, T am not offended in the least, and I hope you 
will not be offended when I tell you what I have done.' 
I then explained this automatic telepathic method of 
communication. I said, 'I do not know whether there 
is a word of truth in what my hand has written, I 
hesitate at telling you, for I confess I think the sum 
which was written as the amount of your debts cannot 
be correctly stated ; it seems to me much too small, con- 



Thought and Force, 155 

sidering the distress in which you seem to be; there- 
fore I will read you that first, but if it is wrong I will 
consider it is rubbish and that your mind in no way in- 
fluenced my hand/ He was interested but incredulous. 
'But,' I said, 'before I read you anything, will you form 
a definite idea in your mind as to how much your debts 
amount to; secondly, as to the amount of money you 
hope to get for that property; thirdly, what it costs 
you to keep up your establishment with your relatives ; 
and fourthly, what you could live upon if you were by 
yourself?' 'Yes,' he said, 'I have thought of all these 
things.' I then read out. 'The amount of your debts 
is about £90.' He started. 'Yes/ he said, 'that is 
right.' Then I said, 'As that is right, I will read the 
rest. You hope to get £100 for your property.' 'Yes/ 
he said, 'that was the figure that was in my mind, 
though I hesitate to mention it for it seems too much.' 
'You say you cannot live upon less than £200 a year 
with your present establishment.' 'Yes,' he said, 'that 
is exactly right.' 'But if you were by yourself you 
could live on £50 a year.' 'Well,' he said, 'a pound a 
week was what I had fixed in my mind.' Therefore 
there has been a perfectly accurate transcription of the 
thoughts in the mind of a comparative stranger written 
out with my own hand at a time when we were at a dis- 
tance of some miles apart, within a few hours of the 
time when he had written apologizing for not having 
given me the information for which I had asked." 

"In the following case the correspondent is a foreign 
lady, doing some work for the Review, but whom Mr. 
Stead had only met once in his life. On the occasion 



156 The .Unknown Made Known. 

now referred to he was to meet her at Redcar Station 
at about three o'clock in the afternoon. He was stop- 
ping at a house ten minutes' walk from the station, and 
it occurred to him that 'about three o'clock' might mean 
before three ; and it was now only twenty of three. No 
time table was at hand ; he simply asked her to use his 
hand to tell him what time the train was due. This 
was done without ever having had any communication 
with her upon the subject of automatic writing. She 
(by Mr. Stead's hand) immediately wrote her name, 
and said the train was due at Redcar Station at ten 
minutes to three. Accordingly he had to leave at once 
— but before starting he said, 'Where are you at this 
moment?' The answer came, T am in the train at 
Middleborough railway station, on my way from 
Hartpool to Redcar.' 

"On arriving at the station he consulted the time- 
table and found the train was due at 2 152. The train, 
however, was late. At three o'clock it had not arrived ; 
at five minutes past three, getting uneasy at the delay, 
he took paper and pencil in his hand and asked where 
she was. Her name was at once written and there was 
added, 'I am in the train rounding the curve before you 
come to Redcar Station — I will be with you in a min- 
ute.' 'Why the mischief have you been so late?' he 
mentally asked. His hand wrote, 'We were detained 
at Middleborough so long — I don't know why.' 

"He put the paper in his pocket and walked to the 
end of the platform just as the train came in. 

"He immediatly went to his friend and exclaimed : 
'How late you are ! What on earth has been the mat- 



Thought and Force. 157 

ter?' To which she replied: 'I do not know, the 
train stopped so long at Middleborough — it seemed as 
if it never would start.' This narrative was fully cor- 
roborated by the lady, who was the passenger referred 
to." 

These phenomena are accounted for by Mr. Stead 
as being the work of an "invisible intelligence/' That 
seems to be an effort to explain or account for a 
mysterious phenomenon by the use of ambiguous terms, 
for he fails to inform us what this "invisible intelli- 
gence" is. Dr. Mason explains these phenomena by 
saying that it is the work of our subliminal self. His 
theory is, that we are composed of a double person- 
ality. That the inferior personality has charge and 
control of the ordinary every-day affairs of life. That 
the superior personality, or subliminal self, has charge 
and control of the mysterious and unexplainable phe- 
nomena of life. We are led to believe from statements 
made in Dr. Mason's book, that in his exhaustive re- 
searches he has found various phenomena that he is 
unable to account for by any of the laws or principles 
of physics or by any of the natural sciences. Hence 
he creates a superior personality, whose "ways are past 
finding out" by the ordinary or inferior personality. 
Dr. Mason is ordinarily very cautious about making 
assertions, and he is usually very thorough in clean- 
ing up his field of argument, but it seems to us he has 
left a gap open in this instance. He does not show us 
the necessity of this subliminal self, he does not show 
that it possesses any powers that could not have been 
bestowed upon or attached to the inferior personality. 



158 The Unknown Made Known. 

The whole theory seems to us a little foggy. It would 
seem to be better to seek for a rational, logical, anal- 
ogous solution, based upon known laws and princi- 
ples, than to look for it in the mirage of our own im- 
aginations. It would certainly be more satisfactory to 
the ordinary understanding, and would simplify mat- 
ters very much if such a solution could be found. 

It has certainly been demonstrated by our ablest 
scientists that there is such a substance or element as 
luminiferous ether, that it has been abundantly dem- 
onstrated by scientists that sound and light are vibra- 
tions, one in the atmosphere the other in the luminif- 
erous ether, will certainly be admitted by all. Also 
that the brain receives its impressions from these vi- 
brations being conducted to it by the proper nerves. It 
has also been shown that thought vibrations in turn can 
be and are communicated to external objects and to the 
brain of our fellow beings in such manner that he will 
respond to our thought. These are certainly all dem- 
onstrable facts. With these as a basis it is not dif- 
ficult to explain and account for the phenomena cited 
by Mr. Stead. In the case of the gentleman that was 
distressed about his indebtedness, he was thinking in- 
tently about his affairs. By sympathy Mr. Stead was 
doing likewise, the ego or soul of each would willingly 
yield the use of its brain to the use of the other, and 
by telepathy questions and answers were passed. The 
thought vibrations of Mr. Stead's brain were trans- 
ferred to the brain of his friend and made their im- 
pressions, the answer was returned in like manner to 
Mr. Stead's brain. The nerves are at the service of 



Thought and Force. 159 

the brain, and the muscles are at the service of the 
nerves, hence Mr. Stead wrote by the suggestion of 
his brain, just as he would write by the suggestion of 
his own brain when in the service of his own ego or 
soul. In the case of the lady correspondent, who was 
visited by the gentleman with an unusual name entirely 
unknown to Mr. Stead. 

The telepathic communication was between Mr. 
Stead and his lady friend. Had Mr. Stead heard the 
name spoken it would have been conveyed to his brain 
by means of the auditory nerve. In this case it was 
conveyed to his brain by the thought vibrations of his 
friend, and the impressions upon his brain were pre- 
cisely the same in each case. In like manner the men- 
tal communication between Mr. Stead and the lady 
journalist, prior to their meeting at the railway station, 
can be explained. In all these cases the principle ele- 
ment was telepathy. It is evident that in all these 
cases there was a willingness with each party to yield 
to the mental wish or request or suggestion of the 
other, to that extent it was hypnotism. The door of 
the mind must be opened, freely, before another can 
enter. It seems germane to introduce another illustra- 
tion from Dr. Mason. In speaking of the complete 
rapport of the subject and the operator, he says, on 

page 55 : 

"One of these curious phenomena is well exhibited 
in what is known as community of sensation, or the 
perception by the subject of sensations experienced by 
the operator. The following experiment, observed by 



160 The Unknown Made Known. 

Mr. Gurney and Dr. Myers of the Society for Psychic- 
al Research, will illustrate this phase of the subject. 

"The sensitive in this experiment is designated as 
Mr. C, and the operator as Mr. S. There was no con- 
tact or any communication whatsoever of the ordi- 
nary kind between them. C. was hynotized, but was 
not informed of the nature of the experiment which 
was to be tried. The operator stood behind the hyno- 
tized subject, and Mr. Gurney, standing behind the op- 
erator, handed him the different substances to be used 
in the experiment, and he, in turn, placed them in his 
own mouth. 

"Salt was first so tasted by the operator, whereupon 
the subject C. instantly and loudly cried out, 'What's 
that salt stuff ?' Sugar was given. C. replied, 'Sweet- 
er; not so bad as before.' Powdered ginger; reply, 
'Hot, dries up your mouth; reminds me of mustard.' 
Sugar given again; reply, 'A little better — a sweetish 
taste.' Other substances were tried, with similar re- 
sults, the last one tasted being vinegar, when it was 
found that C. had fallen into the deeper lethargic con- 
dition and made no reply." This shows how complete- 
ly one person may become in rapport with another, so 
as to taste what they taste, think what they think, be- 
lieve what they believe, etc. 

Such examples as the foregoing are of deep signifi- 
cance to the thoughtful investigator and fraught with 
instruction. While they may be looked upon by the 
thoughtless as a species of necromancy or well-prac- 
ticed tricks. 



Thought and Force. 161 

Again, from Dr. Mason's work on telepathy, page 
282, we quote : 

"I will next present cases where the percipient was 
undoubtedly awake. The following case is reported 
on the authority of Surgeon Harris of the Royal Ar- 
tillery, who, with his two daughters, was a witness of 
the occurrence. 

"A party of children, sons and daughters of the of- 
ficers of artillery stationed at Woolwich, were playing 
in the garden. Suddenly a little girl screamed, and 
stood staring with an aspect of terror at a willow tree 
standing in the grounds. Her companions gathered 
round, asking what ailed her. 'Oh!' said she, 'there 
— there. Don't you see? There is papa lying on the 
ground, and the blood running from a big wound.' All 
assured her that they could see nothing of the kind. 
But she persisted, describing the wound and the posi- 
tion of the body, still expressing surprise that they did 
not see what she so plainly saw. Two of her com- 
panions were daughters of one of the surgeons of the 
regiment, whose house adjoined the garden. They 
called their father, who at once came to the spot. He 
found the child in a state of extreme terror and agony, 
took her into his house, assured her it was all a fancy, 
and having given her restoratives, sent her home. The 
incident was treated by all as what the doctor had called 
it, a fancy, and no more was thought of it. 

"News from India, where the child's father was sta- 
tioned, was in those days slow in coming, but the ar- 
rival of the mail in due course brought the informa- 
tion that the father of the child had been killed by a 



1 62 The Unknown Made Known. 

shot, and died under a tree. Making allowance for 
difference in time, it was found to have been about the 
moment when the daughter had the vision at Wool- 
wich." 

The next case is from Mr. Francis Dart Fenton, 
formerly in the navy department of the Government, 
Auckland, New Zealand. In 1852 when the incident 
occurred, Mr. Fenton was engaged in forming a set- 
tlement on the banks of the Waikato. 

He wrote : 

"March 25th, i860. 

"Two sawyers, Frank Philips and Jack Mulholland, 
were engaged cutting timber for the Rev. R. Maunsell, 
at the mouth of the Awaroa Creek, a very lonely place, 
a vast swamp, no people within miles of them. As 
usual, they had a Maori with them to assist in felling 
trees. He came from Tihorewan, a village on the 
other side of the river, about six miles off. As Frank 
and the native were crosscutting a tree, the native 
stopped suddenly and said, 'What are you come for?' 
looking in direction of Frank. Frank replied, 'What 
do you mean?' He said, T am not speaking to you; 
I am speaking to my brother.' Frank said, 'Where is 
your brother?' The native replied, 'Behind you. What 
do you want?' (to the other Maori). Frank looked 
round and saw nobody; the native no longer saw any 
one, but laid down the saw and said, T shall go across 
the river ; my brother is dead.' Frank laughed at him, 
and reminded him that he had left him quite well on 
Sunday (five days before), and there had been no com- 
munication since. The Maori spoke no more, but got 



Thought and Force. 163 

into his canoe and pulled across. When he arrived at 
the landing-place he met people coming to fetch him. 
His brother had just died. I knew him well. In an- 
swer to inquiries as to his authority for this narrative, 
Mr. Fenton writes the editors of Phantasms of the Liv- 
ing: 

'December 18th, 1883. 

'I knew all the parties well, and it is quite true. In- 
cidents of this sort are not infrequent among the 

Maoris. 

'F. D. Fenton, 

'Late Chief Judge, Native Law Court of New Zea- 
land.' " 

The following case was first published in the Spiritual 
Magazine in 1861, by Robert' H. Collyer, M.D., F.C.S. 

Although published in a spiritual publication, Dr. 
Collyer stated that he himself is not a believer in spirit- 
ualism, but, on the contrary, is a materialist and has 
been so for years. 

He writes from Beta House, 8 Alpha Road, St. 
John's Wood, N. W. : 

"April 15th, 1861. 

"On January 3d, 1856, my brother Joseph being in 
command of the steamer Alice, on the Mississippi, just 
above New Orleans, she came in collison with another 
steamer. The concussion caused the flagstaff or pole 
to fall with great violence, which, coming in contact 
with my brother's head, actually divided the skull, 
causing of necessity instant death. In October, 1857, 
I visited the United States. When at my father's resi- 
dence, Camden, N. J., the melancholy death of 



1 64 The Unknown Made Known. 

my brother became the subject of conversation, and my 
mother narrated to me that at the very time of the ac- 
cident the apparition of my brother Joseph was pre- 
sented to her. This fact was corroborated by my 
father and four sisters. Camden, N. J., is distant from 
the scene of the accident, in a direct line, over one 
thousand miles. My mother mentioned the fact of the 
apparition on the morning of the 4th of January to my 
father and sisters ; nor was it until the 16th, or thirteen 
days after, that a letter was received confirming in 
every particular the extraordinary visitation. It will 
be important to mention that my brother William and 
his wife lived near the locality of the dreadful accident, 
and are now living in Philadelphia ; they have also cor- 
roborated to me the details of the impression produced 
upon my mother." 

Dr. Collyer then quotes a letter from his mother, 
which contains the following sentences : 

"Camden, N. J., United States, March 27th, 1861. 

"My Beloved Son. — On the 3d of January, 1856, I 
did not feel well and retired early to bed. Some time 
after I felt uneasy and sat up in bed ; I looked around 
the room and to my utter amazement, saw Joseph 
standing at the door looking at me with great earnest- 
ness; his head was bandaged up, a-dirty nightcap on, 
and a dirty garment, something like a surplice. He 
was much disfigured about the eyes and face. It made 
me quite uncomfortable the rest of the night. The 
next morning Mary came into my room early. I told 



Thought and Force. 165 

her I was sure I was going to have bad news from 
Joseph. I told all the family at the breakfast table. 
They replied, 'It was only a dream and nonsense;' but 
that did not change my opinion. It preyed on my 
mind, and on the 16th of January I received the news 
of his death ; and singular to say, both William and his 
wife, who were there, say he was attired as I saw him. 
Your ever affectionate mother, 

"Anne E. Collyer." 

In reply to questions, Dr. Collyer wrote : "My 
father, who was a scientific man, calculated the distance 
of longitude between Camden and New Orleans and 
found that the mental impression was at the exact time 
of my brother's death. In the published account 
I omitted to state that my brother Joseph, prior to his 
death, had retired for the night in his berth ; his vessel 
was moored alongside the levee at the time of the col- 
lision by another steamer coming down the Mississippi. 
Of course my brother was in his nightgown. He ran 
on deck on being called and informed that a steamer 
was in close proximity to his own. These circum- 
stances were communicated to me by my brother Wil- 
liam, who was on the spot at the time of the accident." 

In addition to these accounts, Mr. Podnore says : 

"I called upon Dr. Collyer on March 25th, 1884. He 
told me that he received a full account of the story 
verbally from his father, mother and brother in 1857. 
He was quite certain of the precise circumstance in 
time." 

In the above cited cases two at least present the ob- 



1 66 The Unknown Made Known. 

stacle of distance. In the case of the child playing in 
the garden at Woolwich, England, having a vision of 
her father dying in India, and in the case of Mrs. 
Collyer, living at Camden, N. J., having a vision of her 
dying son Joseph near New Orleans, the question of 
distance especially presents itself. 

It will certainly be conceded, from what has been 
said, that thought is force, or the result of force, or 
the manifestation of force; also that the luminiferous 
ether is the vehicle by which the vibrations of thought 
travel. Here are two questions that present them- 
selves : The force of thought, and the resistance of 
the luminiferous ether to thought travel. It is incon- 
ceivable how a vibration can be put in motion without 
force. It has been stated in a former chapter that as- 
tronomers tell us that it takes a wave of light fourteen 
hundred years to travel from a star of the ninth magni- 
tude to the earth. When we consider the infinitesi- 
mal degree of force in a single wave of light, we are 
compelled to concede that the luminiferous ether is ab- 
solutely non-resisting. Again we understand that 
the waves of light and the waves of heat are precisely 
the same, only the difference in the number generated 
per second varies. We have seen the hot sun shine 
upon the railway track, we have seen the rails expand, 
bend, and force themselves from their bedding. We 
know there is force there. We see the sun shine upon 
the earth, its warmth and light awakening the forces 
of nature and of vegetable life, and vegetation begins 
to grow. As there can be no growth without force, we 
are compelled to admit that there is force in sunshine. 



Thought and Force. 167 

Yet no man has been able to construct an instrument 
delicate enough to measure the force of a single wave 
of light. No unit of the force of light has been es- 
tablished. 

In electricity they have succeeded in constructing an 
instrument by which they have established a unit of 
electric force. Electricians have a unit called the erg. 
It expresses the work performed, or the energy ex- 
pended, in lifting a weight of one dyne through one 
centimeter. A dyne is an extremely minute weight, 
being about 1 / 981 of a gramme. A gramme is about 
.0022 of a pound, and a centimeter is about .39 of an 
inch. See Electricity and Electric Engineering, by 
Fisk, pp. 13, 25, 37, 42, and 214 for particulars. 

We trust the day is not far distant when the force 
of a wave of light and of a thought-vibration will be 
as accurately measured as the number of waves of light 
per second are now. 

It is scarcely necessary to apologize to the reader 
for the above digression. It seems to be necessary and 
proper, in considering phenomena in one branch of 
science, to consider similar phenomena in co-ordinate 
branches, because nature's laws are uniform and always 
harmonize. This makes it proper to reason from anal- 
ogy. From the material we imperceptibly pass into 
the immaterial without any change of laws. Hence in 
passing from matter to spirit we are governed by the 
same laws at every stage of our progress. 

We have seen from the experiment with the swing- 
ing knife and causing- a person to look around, that 
thought has force. We have also seen that the lumin- 



1 68 The Unknown Made Known. 

iferous ether is non-resisting, and also that it is the 
vehicle upon which thought travels, therefore all the 
obstacles of distance at once vanish. Hence we are 
forced to admit that when all conditions are favorable 
it is as easy to communicate mentally through a great 
distance as through a short one. 

Now, as to the little girl at Woolwich, England, see- 
ing her bleeding, dying father in India, there might be 
two explanations. The one most likely is, that the dy- 
ing officer seeing the life blood gushing from the 
wound, and realizing that his end was near, thought in- 
tently of his dear little girl that he would never see any 
more, and the picture of his gushing wound and his 
dying condition, that was formed in his brain, was ac- 
tually transferred to the brain of his daughter, and she 
really saw her dying father. The other explanation 
would be this : a friend an acquaintance of the fam- 
ily was present and saw the bleeding wound and the 
prostrate form of the dying officer. At such times our 
thoughts are vivid. The thoughts of the friend would 
naturally revert to the family in England, and he would 
think of that sweet little girl that would never see her 
father again, and the picture, formed in his brain, of 
the dying officer would be transferred to the brain of 
the little girl, and she would see her father precisely as 
seen by the friend. This explanation is not the likely 
one, as there is nothing in the narrative to tell us that 
the little girl continued to see her father after death. 

In the case of the New Zealander, the explanation 
would logically be this : the dying brother, just before 
his death, thought intently about his absent brother, 



Thought and Force. 169 

and wished he was there, so he could see him once more 
before he died. This death scene was transferred to 
his distant brother, and the death picture was repro- 
duced upon his brain with such vividness that he not 
only saw his brother, but understood what he wanted. 
Hence he cried out: What do you want? The pic- 
ture in the brain of the living brother seemed to vanish 
at once, and did not continue after death. When the 
dying brother ceased to think the picture faded. 

In the case of the mother in Camden, N. J., seeing 
her dead son near New Orleans, the natural explana- 
tion would be this : after he was picked up his 
wounds dressed and his head bandaged and he was 
"laid out" his brother William, who was present, would 
view the body, and in the agony of his grief he would 
think intently of his mother, as every man will when 
the hour of deep trouble comes. The picture of the 
dead brother, the nightgown, the bandaged head, the 
disfigured face, formed in the brain of William would 
be transferred to the brain of the mother, and she would 
see the ghastly body of her son just as vividly as Wil- 
liam saw it, because she saw precisely the same pic- 
ture. 

Thus we can account for these phenomena upon rea- 
sonable, logical, analogous grounds without resorting 
to the mysterious and the supernatural. It perhaps 
may do to tell bad boys how goblins and witches beset 
Tarn O'Shanter when he was crossing a lonely bridge 
on a stormy night, because he had been a bad boy, and 
to tell little girls fairy stories to amuse them, but it is 
too late in the day of enlightened civilization for scien- 



170 The Unknown Made Known. 

tists to account for natural phenomena by any such 
makeshifts. 

We will now quote from "Apparitions and Thought 
Transference/' by Frank Podmore, page 227. 

The present chapter, then, will contain instances of 
the action of thought transference in which the trans- 
mitted idea was translated in the percipient's mind, not, 
as in most of the cases described in previous chapters, 
into a simple feeling, or sensation, or dream, but into a 
hallucination representing the human figure. Readers 
of "Phantasms of the Living" will remember the ac- 
count there given of some experiments made by a 
friend of ours, Mr. S. H. B. On several occasions Mr. 
B. succeeded by an effort of the will in causing a phan- 
tom of himself to appear to acquaintances who were 
not aware of his intention to try the experiment. On 
one occasion the figure was seen by two persons sim- 
ultaneously. As at that time results of the kind were 
almost unprecedented, we felt, notwithstanding our 
full confidence in Mr. B., some reluctance in publishing 
an account of his experiments, lest isolated marvels of 
the kind might prejudice our whole case. But fortu- 
nately while "Phantasms of the Living" was actually 
passing through the press, we received, from an inde- 
pendent source, an account of successful experiments 
of the same kind, and within a few weeks of its pub- 
lication a friend of the present writer was induced by 
a perusal of Mr. B.'s narrative to make on his own ac- 
count a similar trial, which completely succeeded. This 
gentleman wrote to me on the 16th of November, 1886, 
as follows: 



Thought and Force. 171 

"From the Rev. Clarence Godfrey. 

"I was so impressed by the account on page 105 that 
I determined to put the matter to an experiment. 

" Retiring at 10.45 ( on the 15th of November, 1886), 
I determined to appear, if possible, to a friend, and ac- 
cordingly I set myself to work with all the volitional 
and determinative energy which I possess, to stand at 
the foot of her bed. I need not say that I never 
dropped the slightest hint beforehand as to my inten- 
tion, such as could mar the experiment, nor had I men- 
tioned the subject to her. As the 'agent' I may describe 
my own experiences. 

"Undoubtedly the imaginative faculty was brought 
extensively into play, as well as the volitional, for I 
endeavored to translate myself, spiritually, into her 
room, and to attract her attention, as it were, while 
standing there. My effort was sustained for perhaps 
eight minutes, after which I felt tired, and was soon 
asleep. The next thing I was conscious of was meet- 
ing the lady next morning {i.e., in a dream, I sup- 
pose?) and asking her at once if she had seen me last 
night. The reply came, 'Yes.' 'How?' I inquired. 
Then in words strangely clear and low, like a well aud- 
ible whisper, came the answer, T was sitting beside 
you.' These words, so clear, awoke me instantly, and 
I felt I must have been dreaming; but on reflection I 
remembered what I had been 'willing' before I fell 
asleep, and it struck me, 'This must be a reflex action 
from the percipient.' My watch showed 3.40 A.M. 
The following is what I wrote immediately in pencil, 



172 The Unknown Made Known. 

standing in my night dress : 'As I reflected upon those 
clear words, they struck me as being quite intuitive, I 
mean subjective, and to have proceeded from within, 
as my own conviction, rather than a communication 
from any one else. And yet I can't remember her face 
at all, as one can after a vivid dream !' 

"But the words were uttered in a clear, quick tone, 
which was most remarkable, and awoke me at once. 

"My friend in the note with which she sent me the 
enclosed account of her own experience, says : 'I re- 
member the man put all the lamps out soon after I 
came up stairs, and that is only done about a quarter 
to four." 

Mr. Godfrey received from the percipient on the 16th 
of November an account of her side of the experience, 
and at his request she wrote it down as follows : 

"Yesterday, viz., the morning of November 16th, 
1886, about half-past three o'clock, I woke up with a 
start and an idea that some one had come into the 
room. I heard a curious sound, but fancied it might 
be the birds in the ivy outside. Next I experienced a 
strange restless longing to leave the room and go down 
stairs. This feeling became so overpowering that at 
last I rose and lit a candle and went down, thinking if 
I could get some soda water it might have a quieting 
effect. On returning to my room I saw Mr. Godfrey 
standing under the large window on the staircase. He 
was dressed in his usual style, and with an expression 
on his face that I have noticed when he has been look- 
ing very earnestly at anything. He stood there, and I 



Thought and Force. 173 

held up the candle and gazed at him for three or four 
seconds in utter amazement, and then as I passed up 
the staircase he disappeared. The impression left on 
my mind was so vivid that I fully intended waking a 
friend who occupied the same room as myself, but re- 
membering that I should only be laughed at as ro- 
mantic and imaginative, refrained from doing so. 

"I was not frightened at the appearance of Mr. God- 
frey, but felt much excited, and could not sleep after- 
word." 

On the 2 1st of the same month I heard a full ac- 
count of the incident given above from Mr. Godfrey, 

and on the day following from Mrs. . Mrs. 

told me that the figure appeared quite distinct 

and life-like at first, though she could not remember to 
have noticed more than the upper part of the body. 
As she looked it grew more and more shadowy, and 
finally faded away. 

In this case we have an example of intentional or 
conscious thought-transference or telepathy. Mr. 
Godfrey designedly transferred the picture of himself 
from his own brain to the brain of his friend. He did 
not translate himself spiritually into the presence of his 
friend to be seen by the physical eye. That would be 
impossible. For the physical eye is acted on by physic- 
al agents alone. Mr. Godfrey by thought- vibrations 
formed a picture of himself on his own brain and then 
by willing transferred that picture to the brain of his 
friend and she saw the picture which had the delusive 
appearance of standing in her presence. 

We want to banish the misleading idea from our 



174 The Unknown Made Known. 

minds that there is any such thing as seeing a spirit 
with the physical eye. We want to impress this thing 
upon our minds, that there is not the least possible re- 
semblance between a spiritual body and a physical 
body. Imaginative artists have drawn pictures of the 
ascension of the spirit of Christ; just as well try to 
picture the attraction of gravitation. Both powerful 
forces but invisible to the physical eye. The sooner 
we can clear our minds of some of this abominable 
rubbish, the sooner we can see things as they are. The 
effort to materialize spirit is the foundation and sup- 
port of all the superstitions that have befogged the 
human understanding in ages past. We have cer- 
tainly shown that there is a point where spirit and 
matter imperceptibly blend, but it is not only beyond 
the reach of the natural eye, but far beyond the reach 
of the most powerful microscope. 

We will once more quote from Mason, page 24 : 
"The second case is reported by a man of excellent 
reputation to whom the incident was stated by both 
Lady G. and her sister, the percipients in the case. It 
is as follows : 

"Lady G. and her sister had been spending the even- 
ing with their mother, who was in her usual health and 
spirits when they left her. In the middle of the night 
the sister awoke in a fright and said to her husband: 
'I must go to my mother at once ; do order the carriage. 
I am sure she is taken ill/ The husband, after trying 
in vain to convince his wife that it was only a fancy, 
ordered the carriage. As she was approaching her 



Thought and Force. 175 

mother's house, where two roads meet, she saw Lady 
G.'s carriage approaching. As soon as they met each 
asked the other why she was there at that unseason- 
able hour, and both made the same reply : 

" 'I could not sleep, feeling sure my mother was ill, 
and so I came to see.' As they came in sight of the 
house they saw their mother's confidential maid at the 
door, who told them when they arrived that their 
mother had been taken suddenly ill and was dying, 
and that she had expressed an earnest wish to see her 
daughters." 

The reporter adds : 

"The mother was a lady of strong will and had a 
great influence over her daughters." 

Instances similar to the above are quite numerous, 
and every one has knowledge, more or less direct, of 
such cases. 

From what has been said about thought-vibrations 
it is easy to understand how all this was brought about. 
It is also plain that this is a pure case of telepathy, 
where the wish of one person was communicated to 
another by a physical and natural agent, so distinctly 
that response was inevitable. 

The following case is one in which we are person- 
ally familiar, being personally acquainted with the 
parties. 

Prof. G. W. Hull, an accomplished music teacher, 
was conducting a musical recital at the M. E. Church 
in Huron, S. D., on the evening of May nth, 1900. 
He was playing a solo on his violin. Miss Florence 
Sterling, daughter of Hon. G. W. Sterling of this city, 



176 The Unknown Made Known. 

was playing the accompaniment on the piano. Miss 
Sterling is a fine musician and elocutionist, of a nerv- 
ous temperament, with a highly sensitive and sympa- 
thetic nature. The evening was quite warm, the win- 
dows were open, and the wind was blowing through 
the church. While they were playing the wind blew 
over the Professor's music. He stopped to adjust his 
music. Miss Sterling was sitting with her back to 
Prof. Hull, and could not see him nor his music stand, 
but at the instant the music blew over, Miss Sterling 
received an instantaneous impulse to stop, without hav- 
ing received any notification from him whatever. 
When Prof. Hull adjusted his music, he immediately 
began playing. Miss Sterling received a like impulse 
to start and did start at the instant he started. This 
was all done without the fraction of a note of discord 
in their playing. This occurred three times in succes- 
sion, with the same results. Miss Sterling's mother 
was sitting in the audience, and being herself a musi- 
cian, she noticed how completely the interval was made 
without the least discord, and wondered how they 
could do it. Miss Sterling says that at all times when 
she is playing an accompaniment, if the principal gets 
nervous, she gets nervous also. " Sometimes," she says, 
"I nearly get wild." Again, if the principal is cool 
and collected, she is cool and collected. In other words, 
she seems to be in complete rapport with the principal. 
All the parties to the above are perfectly truthful and 
trustworthy, there is certainly not the least equivoca- 
tion in any particular. 

The above incident is important because it demon- 



Thought and Force. 177 

strates beyond doubt that there was direct and instan- 
taneous communication between the brain of Prof. Hull 
and that of Miss Sterling. It also demonstrates that 
the communication was by other means than by the or- 
dinary senses. We have certainly demonstrated that 
thought is produced by vibrations upon the brain, and 
that these thought- vibrations can be transferred and 
impressed upon another brain, using the luminiferous 
ether as a vehicle. With these facts before us we can 
readily see how Miss Sterling could know when to stop 
and when to start. In this incident Prof. Hull was the 
leader, the dictator. Miss Sterling the recipient. By 
consent she yielded to his dictation, she was playing 
the accompaniment. For the time being, as far as mu- 
sic was concerned, his thoughts were her thoughts, she 
was completely under his control. 

In the above incident we have a clear case of tel- 
epathy with a tinge of hypnotism. The transference 
or communication of Prof. Hull's thoughts to Miss 
Sterling was telepathy. Miss Sterling's voluntary 
yielding to Prof. Hull's suggestions was hypnotism. 

We might go on to multiply cases ad infinitum, but 
nothing would be gained by it, enough has been said 
to give the reader a clear idea of thought-force, 
thought-vibrations, and thought-transference, and also 
how one mind can have power over another. 

It will be seen from the above that thought-force 
or thought-vibrations are manifested in an innumera- 
ble number of ways, and in all degrees of intensity, 
from the most positive and vivid conception that some 
terrible disaster is happening, or that some friend is in 



178 The Unknown Made Known. 

great peril, or in deep distress and needs or wishes 
your immediate presence; to the gentlest and faintest 
impression that some one is thinking about you or is 
near you. Also from the most positive and absolute 
exercise of authority or influence that one person may 
have over another, to the faintest influence that advice 
or counsel may have on a person. We should always 
bear this in mind, that hypnotic influence is an unrea- 
soning influence. A person does a thing simply be- 
cause another wishes or dictates it, not because he 
thinks it to be the proper thing to do as the result of 
his own reasoning powers. 

We see these things constantly being enacted in all 
the affairs of men. Every political, religious, or re- 
form craze that sweeps through the country, or that 
throws a community into convulsions has its origin in 
telepathy, hypnotism, or thought-transference, one or 
all. Mahomet formulated the short, terse, war-cry : 
"There is but one God and Mahomet is his prophet." 
That short sentence comprised all that the depraved 
intellect of the time could grasp. The audacity of the 
undertaking was only equaled by its marvelous results. 
A large portion of the civilized world was subjugated, 
and largely remain in abject, mental, hypnotic slavery 
to this day. From Sinope to Saguntum— from south- 
ern Europe to southern Asia and Africa plaudits to 
Mahomet were chanted — because millions of people 
were politically and religiously enslaved ! These refer 
to abnormal conditions and not a deliberate, logical 
consideration of the great questions, religious, political 
or moral, that may present themselves for solution. 



Thought and Force. 179 

Occasionally a would-be reformer will come before the 
people denouncing in unmeasured terms the present 
forms of political and religious society. He will an- 
nounce in the most positive manner that he has dis- 
covered the true way in which society, both religious 
and political, should be organized and conducted. He 
will gather his adherents around him and perhaps or- 
ganize a society in accordance with his radical and ex- 
travagant views. Perhaps other societies will be or- 
ganized, and thus it will spread through the country 
like a pestilence. The advocates of this new craze will 
listen to nothing but to their own extravagant, unrea- 
sonable, impractical views, and will look with amaze- 
ment upon those who disagree with them, unconscious 
all the while that they are hypnotized, and that their 
brain is acting abnormally, or by the direction of some 
impostor. The history of civilization teaches us that 
from some cause or causes there come times of finan- 
cial depression and a general derangement of business 
affairs. Anybody knows when such times exist, but to 
give the true cause or causes is a more difficult problem. 
At such times some bold, brilliant, unscrupulous agi- 
tator will come before the people and announce in very 
serious and positive terms that he has discovered the 
prime cause of the trouble. He will plausibly point 
out certain imaginary wrongs with great vehemence, 
the people anxious to find a remedy will gradually take 
it up. The new doctrine will rapidly gather force, till 
it sweeps through the land like a prairie fire, and the 
people will become greatly agitated. Times will grad- 
ually begin to get better, without these imaginary 



180 The Unknown Made Known. 

wrongs being corrected. The excitement will gradu- 
ally die down until finally we hear no more about it. 
And the only way one of these enthusiastic advocates 
will refer to it will be by a bland smile. The above is 
simply one of the forms and manifestations of hyp- 
notism. The people, who are hungry for a simple and 
immediate remedy of existing derangements, eagerly 
listen to the declamatory ravings of the agitator, who 
paints their grievances in glowing colors, and become 
possessed of his abnormal thoughts. Reason is de- 
throned and they become impelled by the blind en- 
thusiasm of a mob. They cannot be convinced because 
they are not actuated by sober reason. All that can be 
done is to hold things steady till they cool down and 
then no remedy is needed for there is no longer any dis- 
ease, reason has asserted its sway. We should always 
be careful to distinguish between great national wrongs 
that stand in the way of a higher civilization and a 
fanatical craze that has no foundation in fact. 

It is needless to multiply illustrative examples. It 
will be easy for the reader to analyze every great move- 
ment and tell whether it is inspired by religious or 
patriotic fervor, or incited by fanatical enthusiasm or 
possibly by personal aggrandizement or profit. 



CHAPTER X. 

THE SOUL SPIRITUALLY CONSIDERED. 

In a former chapter we discussed the evidences that 
seem to establish the existence of a spirit or soul that 
dominates the brain; that spiritual entity which is the 
real man, without which all the vaunted powers and 
possibilities and hopes of man would at once vanish. 
We confined our remarks to its physical manifestations. 
In the present chapter we propose to treat of the func- 
tions of the soul in reference to its spiritual operations, 
or its powers and functions in their operations inde- 
pendently of the brain. In order to be better under- 
stood we might qualify by saying, that there are cer- 
tain things that the soul can do only through the 
mediation of the brain; and other things that it can 
do independently of the brain. Or in other words 
there are certain functions that are purely physical, and 
others that are purely spiritual, and others that seem 
to be a combination of both. Again, we find that where 
the physical and spiritual meet they seem to blend to- 
gether in such manner that no definite line of demar- 
kation can be discovered. 

So that it is impossible to discuss one class of func- 
tions without trenching more or less on the others. 
In order to make our analysis clear we will en- 
deavor to begin at the beginning and work up, 
so as to make our structure intelligible. We are 



182 The Unknown Made Known. 

all conscious of the fact that the soul is insepa- 
rable from the body during life. We all know that 
the soul possesses certain peculiar characteristics that 
bear the evidences of being inherited from its ances- 
tors, hence we conclude that the soul is propagated 
with the life of the body. We have shown in a former 
chapter that vegetable life and animal life were en- 
dowed by the Creator with the power or quality of 
propagation, and that after the body formed by that life 
ceased to grow or perform its functions, and had ful- 
filled its purpose, the life of the vegetable or animal 
died or perished, and had no more existence save 
by its posterity. Or in other words, when the 
life had finished the body that it was its mission 
to finish, the life perished or died, the body decom- 
posed and returned to the original elements from which 
it was made. The body is not propagated. Matter 
cannot propagate and multiply matter. If it could and 
did the universe would in time become solid matter. 
"All things that have a beginning have an ending," is 
an old truism. Vegetable and animal life by propaga- 
tion have a beginning. We know by every-day observa- 
tion that they have an ending. We know that the 
birth of every human being means a tragedy. Now 
shall we reason from analogy and say that as the hu- 
man soul came into existence by propagation it must 
necessarily have an ending ? We might say yes, unless 
there is provision for some further propagation or 
quickening. We know, from geological fossils, that 
there were vegetable and animal forms that are now 
extinct, and of necessity their lives are also extinct. 



The Soul Spiritually Considered. 183 

Reasoning from analogy we are justified in believing 
that the vegetable and animal forms that we now see 
will, in the fulness of time, become extinct, both in 
form and in life. Disagreeable as it may be, we are 
irresistibly driven to the conclusion that in time man 
will cease to be an inhabitant of the earth, at least in 
his present state, and in his turn become extinct, both 
in form and in life. Will his soul also become extinct, 
and be no more forever? Is that to be the end of all 
this strife and hope and struggle and faith ? Is all this 
creation, this display of omnipotence and wisdom to 
end in a phantom, in a sickening farce? If not, what 
is the final purpose and how is it to be accomplished 
by a rational, logical, comprehensible process? The 
Supreme Being obscures nothing by a fog or mystery. 
Man is certainly the climax of physical creation. He 
stands next to the Creator, there is no blank to be 
filled. If there is not a higher life that is to in some 
way emerge from this life, then all beyond is an ab- 
solute void, and man's existence here is a freak and not 
a purpose. 

In tracing the operations and developments of nature 
from the spirit-atom to the creation of man, we see a 
regular, orderly systematic development, we see re- 
vealed step by step a systematic design in which there 
is no break nor inconsistency, each form will be seen 
by close examination to be prophetic of that which is 
to follow. If all this apparent preparation is to cease 
and perish with man, then all this ado creating and 
adorning the universe with all its splendor and magnifi- 
cence is a farcical fraud, a sickening failure, a pur- 



184 The Unknown Made Known. 

poseless expenditure of power and wisdom. Up to this 
time we have been unable to detect the slightest in- 
consistency, no purposeless display of power, no stage 
show; nothing but the systematic working out of some 
great and noble purpose by the operation of perfect 
and immutable laws. 

Let us see if we can get an analysis that will clear 
away the fog and let us out of the difficulty. From 
what has been said heretofore, it will be understood 
that we are not a believer in what is popularly known 
as Darwinian Evolution, where one form by some in- 
herent principle evolves a higher form without the as- 
sistance of a higher or an external power. But we 
believe that every new form that appears is the fulfill- 
ment of a design by a supreme being. We believe 
that every new form that has appeared is the result of 
an act of creation, which took place in the microscopic 
protoplasmic cell, and was developed by its own par- 
ticular and peculiar life by the operation of existing 
law. We do not believe that any form by any possi- 
bility can produce another higher form without exter- 
nal power. We do not believe that any form can pro- 
duce anything but an exact type of itself. But some 
will say, we can take an animal or a plant and by sys- 
tematic culture we can make almost another form. 
True, but its progenitor a thousand years ago would 
have made the same development if it had been sub- 
jected to the same culture. The principle was there 
that only awaited conditions that would allow it to de- 
velop. In propagation there are two conditions that 
must exist, otherwise there can be no result — no off- 



The Soul Spiritually Considered. 185 

spring. First, there must be two parties or elements 
entirely differently constituted, the one must be the ex- 
act opposite of the other. Second, there must be a 
willingness to act, an attraction, a desire. These are 
irrevocable laws of nature that none will dispute. 
Propagation is a reproduction, not a creation, nothing 
more, nothing less. It is impossible to conceive how 
any form or principle can be reproduced in any degree 
not possessed by either of the participants. The ab- 
surdity of such a proposition is patent upon its face. 
One party or principal cannot reproduce, it takes dual- 
ity ; this is one of nature's unalterable laws. Nature or 
the Creator never makes two laws that conflict. An 
instance of that kind has never been discovered. That 
would be an evidence of imperfection and short-sight- 
edness in the Creator, a condition that does not exist. 
We will leave this proposition for the present till we 
bring up another matter. 

We will take it for granted, for the present, that 
God's purpose in creating man was but a stepping-stone 
to a higher life. Is the present plan to reach that life 
the right one? We frequently hear it asked : "If God is 
all-wise and all-powerful, why did he create man weak 
enough to yield to temptation? And why did he suf- 
fer temptations to come within his reach ?" 

It is a self-evident fact that man is a responsible be- 
ing, that he is "a free moral agent," that he thinks, he 
reasons, he acts. Should he have been created other- 
wise? Could he have been created otherwise without 
making him inferior to what he is? These are ques- 



1 86 The Unknown Made Known. 

tions that lie at the threshold of eternal life and should 
be analyzed and answered correctly. Can we do it? 
National and international affairs are based upon the 
principle of responsibility. All the laws, rules, and 
regulations of civilized society recognize the fact that 
man is responsible for his own acts. All this is based 
upon the principle that wherever there is power re- 
sponsibility attaches. If temptations are withheld from 
man he is entitled to no reward for spurning them, for 
he has done nothing meriting reward. If he had been 
created strong enough to resist temptations he would 
be entitled to no reward, for it was not his doings. The 
horse is entitled to no credit for not being a donkey, 
for he had nothing to do about it. The horse has no 
choice whatever in being greater or less than what he 
is, hence his inferiority. Hence he is an irresponsible 
being. But by creating man a responsible being, hav- 
ing the right to "choose between good and evil," "a 
free moral agent," and surrounding him with tempta- 
tions and making him conscious of results, he is given 
the noblest opportunity and noblest character of which 
it is possible to conceive. How could man become en- 
titled to eternal life if there were no conditions with 
which he must comply? It is impossible for there to 
be any propagation or regeneration without the willing 
consent of both parties or elements concerned. There 
is no higher life, no future life, no eternal life for tne 
brute, because he possesses no element or quality or 
desire from which or by which such a life can be quick- 
ened or propagated. There is absolutely nothing there 
to be a party to such an act or process. Such a prin- 



The Soul Spiritually Considered. 187 

ciple cannot be acquired or evolved, it must be created 
by a power that is superior to that which is created. 
A horse cannot construct a machine because it involves 
principles that are beyond his comprehension. By anal- 
ogy we say, one of the lower animals cannot create, 
evolve, or propagate another animal having qualities, 
functions or powers superior to itself, because it is be- 
yond its capacity or comprehension. It is impossible 
to form or produce anything without a preceding in- 
telligent design. 

Another important problem presents itself, that it 
would probably be well to dispose of here, before com- 
pleting the analysis of the soul. 

What is the precise manner by which superior forms 
or creatures are brought into existence? We have 
stated that creation proceeded by accretion and not by 
evolution. We will now explain more in detail what 
we mean by accretion. We believe in a Supreme Be- 
ing who made all things "and without whom there was 
not anything made that was made." We have seen that 
vegetable life because of its dual nature has the power 
of propagation. We have seen in the history of the 
rocks that vegetable life preceded animal life. Why 
should vegetable life precede animal life? Because, 
first, nature builds upward and not downward, vege- 
table life is inferior in its organization to animal life, 
the inferior precedes the superior, and, secondly, vege- 
tables feed upon inorganic matter, such as the earths, 
while animals feed upon organic matter, such as vege- 
tables and other animals. When conditions were fa- 
vorable for a higher type of life than vegetable life a 



1 88 The Unknown Made Known. 

new principle was added to what was already created 
and a new form came into existence. Not a new form 
evolved by an old form or existing form, but new 
qualities added to existing forms by an external power, 
and we have animal life in its lowest form. We may 
call this bringing into existence of animal life, creation, 
accretion, or propagation, just to suit our fancy. Call 
it what we may, it requires an act of supreme power to 
accomplish it. But it may be asked : "How can uncon- 
scious vegetable life be willing or have a desire to co- 
operate with the Creator to produce a higher life?" 
In this way we know that there is a latent energy, yes, 
an active energy that exists in the plant life that mani- 
fests itself by a desire to grow, to expand, to develop, 
just as we find in the soul of man a desire, a hope, a 
longing for something higher. The one is an uncon- 
scious instinct, the other a conscious reasoning hope. 
This is not a theory nor a supposition, it is a fact that 
none can gainsay. In this manner creation proceeded, 
new forms appeared from time to time as conditions 
were made favorable, until we come to man, the cli- 
max of physical creation, in whom we find the addi- 
tional quality, the human soul. This brings us to the 
point where we can logically understand what is meant 
by the "quickening of the spirit," "regeneration" so 
graphically described by Jesus Christ to Nicodemus, 
by which the soul emerges into eternal life. This ex- 
plains what happened to Abram and Sarai, by which 
a chosen people were raised up. This explains how 
and by what means Jesus Christ became possessed of 
divine attributes. This explains the plan and design 



The Soul Spiritually Considered. 189 

of creation and the mission of man by a logical, rea- 
sonable demonstration, without violating or suspend- 
ing a single law of the universe, without resorting to 
befogging generalities or ambiguous terms to explain 
something we don't understand, and thus try to mis- 
lead others into believing we do understand it. This 
also explains how and why man must be a party to his 
own salvation, that eternal life is not thrust upon him 
without his desire and co-operation. 

Some one has said: "Every natural fact is a sym- 
bol of some spiritual fact, and no spiritual fact can be 
understood except by first knowing the natural fact, 
which is, as it were, its double." We might go still 
further back and say, every natural fact is the offspring 
of some spiritual fact, that the spiritual must of ne- 
cessity precede the natural or physical, that the off- 
spring must of necessity be the counterpart of the pa- 
rent or parents. The inspired penman informs us that 
when God created man "in His own image created he 
him." That evidently refers to his spiritual nature or 
soul. That is, that the soul of man bore the imprint 
of the Creator. It was simply impossible for him to 
do anything else than to reproduce himself in a modi- 
fied form. And that is just what man is in his best es- 
tate. If the proposition is correct, that creation has 
proceeded by accretion, that new forms are brought 
into existence by adding some new quality to existing 
forms — a proposition that it is hard to dispute, because 
there is no evidence to the contrary — we can easily see 
how the soul of man, being brought into existence by 
adding a new and a divine principle to an existing 



190 The Unknown Made Known. 

form, is inferior to the Creator, because it has in its 
warp and woof an inferior element or principle. This 
inferior element has been the cause of all our trouble 
and sorrow. This inferior element must be conquered 
by regeneration before we can inherit eternal life. If 
we take the position that when the time arrived to 
create the soul of man that God changed his whole 
manner of procedure, that he set aside all the laws and 
forces that had been instrumental in creation up to this 
time, we insensibly take the position that his laws were 
imperfect and inadequate to perform any and all things 
necessary to be done. A very awkward position to 
take. The only tenable position to take is, that all the 
laws of the universe are absolutely perfect and un- 
changeable. That God himself cannot change or sus- 
pend one of them, any more than he can change or 
modify his own pure and perfect nature. Any other 
position would be an acknowledgment of his imper- 
fect and fickle purpose and nature, a position that bor- 
ders on sacrilege. But some one will ask: If God, 
being perfect, created all existing forms, were they not 
likewise perfect? And if they were used as a base or 
stock to build upon or graft to, how could the new 
forms be imperfect? We use language and words as 
we find them. We frequently have to define a word in 
order that our meaning may be understood, and some- 
times that is inadequate. A horse is a perfect animal 
for the purpose for which he was created, and fulfills 
his mission perfectly, but he is imperfect for duties or 
functions that are beyond his capacity. Now, suppose 
that in the constructive course of creation the time has 






The Soul Spiritually Considered. 191 

arrived when an animal of superior qualities to the 
horse should be brought into being, the Creator adds 
the necessary new qualities to the spirit-life of the 
horse, and a new being is brought into existence. Not 
a superior horse but a new creature of enlarged capac- 
ity. This new creature is the offspring of two parents, 
an inferior and a superior parent. Hence this new 
form or creature has a dual nature that is constantly 
in conflict. Sometimes one seems to predominate and 
sometimes the other. Comparatively speaking we call 
this the good and evil in the animal nature, when in 
reality it is the operation of two natures of different 
capacities, both good when normally exercised. Every 
human being is conscious of the existence of these two 
principles within himself. One of higher aspirations 
and nobler impulses and capacities than the other. 
There seems to be a constant conflict between them. 
What we call the evil principle is more negative than 
positive, it simply fails to equal its mate in capacity. 
Again, if, as we have before stated, the grand purpose 
and climax of creation was the bringing into existence 
of a spiritual being to be endowed with eternal life and 
to dwell with God the father during the ceaseless revo- 
lutions of eternity, now if that spiritual being is cre- 
ated independently of existing created beings, what is 
the purpose of all this complicated universe, that in the 
end is to be toppled over and in no way utilized for 
the accomplishment of this great purpose? By just 
bearing in mind that God is consistent, methodical, and 
perfect in all that he does, and that nothing could be 
dispensed with, and nothing could be added without 



192 The Unknown Made Known. 

fatally marring the completion of a perfect design and 
purpose, we will avoid many bewildering entangle- 
ments. That is to say that from the beginning each 
act of creation was the stepping-stone to the next high- 
er, until man is reached, and he is the stepping-stone 
to eternal life. A beautiful system, a grand design, a 
transcendently sublime purpose! 

So much for the nature or character of the soul con- 
sidered separately from the body. We will now take 
into consideration the functions of the soul as to its 
power to act or make itself manifest without the co- 
operation of the body or brain. 

All will certainly admit that the brain cannot act 
systematically and effectively without the directing 
hand of the soul, that the soul stimulates, suppresses, 
or directs thought as the case may be. That the brain 
is the machine and the soul is the operator. We have 
shown that thought is vibrations or is caused by vi- 
brations, that vibrations are caused by force or are 
transmitted by force, that the soul can cause the mind 
to think, hence the soul possesses the inherent 
power to cause vibrations. If the soul can cause 
vibrations in the brain, it can cause vibra- 
tions in the luminiferous ether, and can, by this 
manner, communicate with another soul without 
the intervention of another brain. But let us first 
see if we can discover that the soul acts independently 
of the brain within the brain. Suppose a student is 
preparing a lesson in mathematics and is disturbed by 
flitting thoughts of scenes in a ball game. Becoming 
tired of this frivolous interruption, he says (who says?) 



The Soul Spiritually Considered. 193 

"Stop this nonsense! and put your whole thought 
on this lesson !" The cause of the disturbance is this : 
both sides of the brain are at work on different lines at 
the same time, hence the confusion. The mandate of 
the soul to stop this double work is a sort of mandate 
to itself to put all of its energies in one set of organs. 
This would lead us to believe that the soul itself is 
a duality, which is unquestionably true, as we under- 
stand it had a double parentage. Now, is it not ap- 
parent that here is a mandate coming from some source 
that is superior to the brain and independent of the 
brain ? We cannot conceive of how the soul could com- 
municate with the brain through the brain. Let us try 
to conceive that the soul is an inherent principle of the 
brain, and has no existence separately and apart from 
the brain, and its manifestations are simply the action 
of the brain. We see at a flash the inconsistency. In- 
vestigation and research would be an impossibility, be- 
cause the different organs of the mind could not act in 
concert for the want of a governing power. Just as 
well expect an army to be successfully maneuvered by 
the company commanders while attached to and a part 
of their companies. This fact is so apparent that it is 
needless to prolong the discussion. No man can ar- 
gue himself into being a brute and being destitute of 
superior spiritual powers, though he exhaust the re- 
sources of his ingenuity. After all his sophistry has 
been exhausted in the vain attempt to prove that there 
is no superior supervising spirit that controls him, the 
soul rises up in its dignity and says : "But ah ! I am 
here ! the most positive proof that I exist I" Spiritual 



194 The Unknown Made Known. 

laws and spiritual affairs are so subtle and evasive it is 
difficult to grasp them and investigate them. Thought, 
like everything else that comes into existence, has two 
parents, the brain and the soul. The brain is physical 
and has the imperfections and limitations of all physic- 
al existence. Thought must necessarily inherit the 
imperfections of its physical parent. Hence the dif- 
ficulty we have in grasping spiritual things aright. 
Some say : "Let such things alone, in trying to grasp 
forbidden things you will go crazy." That is simply 
another way of saying: "The grapes are sour." We 
are taught that he who buried his talent received no 
reward. That is a truism that is imperishable. In 
the investigation of spiritual things we must act with 
great circumspection and keep in touch with basic facts 
or we will wander off and get lost. The instant we at- 
tempt to explain a spiritual phenomenon by ambiguous 
terms we are lost. 

We sometimes get glimpses of things that vanish so 
suddenly that they are gone before we fairly compre- 
hend them. They don't seem to be the result of 
thought or reason, but simply come with a flash and as 
quickly disappear. For instance, a general commanding 
an army on the field of battle suddenly finds himself 
confronted with a condition wholly unexpected. Some- 
thing must instantly be done to rescue his army from 
impending danger. In a flash he orders a certain move- 
ment, which proves to be just the thing, the only thing 
to do to save his army. And as quick as it can be told 
apparently victory changes sides. After the battle is 
over it will probably take that general an hour to reason 



The Soul Spiritually Considered. 195 

out why that was just the move to make. Perhaps not 
a reader that sees this, but can recall an instance or in- 
stances in his own life where he has been required to 
act instantly, and immediately does a thing, as we say, 
"without thinking." And when it is all over he will 
say: "What made me do that?" We will suggest an 
explanation and leave the reader as umpire. The soul 
without waiting to operate through the reasoning facul- 
ties issues a dictum to the proper motory organs, just 
as the soul wll say to an organ that is making a fool- 
ish interruption when something important is under 
consideration : "Stop that nonsense and keep still I" 
It is so difficult for the physical to comprehend the 
spiritual — because the spiritual is above and superior 
to the physical — that an attempt to get a clear con- 
ception of spiritual manifestations is attended with al- 
most insuperable difficulties. When there are no words 
to express our meaning we have to do the best we can 
in a round-about way. Believing that a natural fact 
is a symbol of some spiritual fact, we will not attempt 
to formulate any new law for spiritual conditions that 
has no counterpart in natural or physical conditions. 
All will agree that thought in its nature is spiritual, 
it has all the elements of spirit and none of the elements 
or characteristics of matter. All will agree to another 
proposition, that at least one of the parents of thought 
is physical — the brain. As inert matter can do nothing 
unaided or unassisted, without the cooperation of a 
spiritual agent, it stands to reason that the brain must 
have the cooperation of a spiritual agent to make it 
possible to produce thought. Thought being the off- 



196 The Unknown Made Known. 

spring of a spiritual and a physical parent is made the 
vehicle by which the spiritual reaches the physical. 
It is the connecting link between the seen and unseen, 
the visible and the invisible. Most of our thoughts 
are about physical things or physical conditions or laws 
or principles that affect physical affairs. When we at- 
tempt to think about purely spiritual conditions we feel 
that we are reaching after something that is almost, if 
not entirely, out of our reach. It is like going into a 
smoky room and trying to catch the smoke in our 
hands, we know that the smoke is there but evades our 
grasp. Yet smoke can be caught and an oil extracted 
from it. In like manner it may be possible to compre- 
hend spiritual affairs and get substantial instruction 
therefrom. 

We have shown clearly that man has a soul that has 
the inherent unaided power to act upon the brain. 
The brain does not, cannot, act upon the soul. The 
brain is subservient to the soul. Hence the power to 
act abides with the soul. If the sole power to act 
abides with the soul, the brain is simply an instrument 
for the use and service of the soul. There must of 
necessity abide with either the soul or brain the absolute 
power to direct, control, to govern. There can be no 
division of authority, that would result in conflict and 
confusion. There must be unity of action somewhere. 
That the brain possesses this dictatorial power is ab- 
horrent to reason. That the soul is the crowned 
monarch is in accordance with every known law 
of matter and spirit. The brain bears the same 
relation to the soul that tools do to the me- 



The Soul Spiritually Considered. 197 

chanic. If the above propositions are correct, it 
makes it possible for the soul to act independently of 
the brain and without its concurrence. This makes 
it much clearer that the soul can act directly upon the 
motory organs without operating through the reason- 
ing faculties. It has been shown that the soul receives 
its impressions by vibrations, that it communicates 
with the brain by vibrations. From this we can see 
how it is possible for one soul to communicate with 
another by vibrations using the luminiferous ether as 
a vehicle. The soul having power to cause vibrations 
in the brain can likewise cause vibrations in the lumin- 
iferous ether. The soul having power or the capacity 
to receive impressions in the luminiferous ether coming 
from outside sources, can likewise receive impressions 
from another soul by the same medium. 

If we can by any possibility get a clear conception of 
a consciousness of one soul communicating with an- 
other soul without the cooperation or intervention of 
the brain, it will simplify matters and assist us very 
much with our analysis. If we are conversing with a 
friend, while listening to his statements or arguments 
as the case may be, we are conscious that our brain 
and our soul are actively engaged in dissecting and 
analyzing his arguments, or examining his statements 
as to their apparent truth or falsity. Or, if we are 
sitting alone in some quiet place intently engaged in 
solving some problem, or maturing some plan, we are 
conscious that the soul is directing the train of 
thoughts. One organ is called up in its turn and an- 
other is retired that the train of thoughts may be order- 



198 The Unknown Made Known. 

ly and systematic. We are conscious of the fact that 
the brain is doing its full share of the work. We are 
conscious that a certain organ is actively engaged and 
another is in repose. These are conceptions of which 
we are not mistaken. There is no theory or specula- 
tion about it, all is clear and unmistakable. But when 
we leave these clear and positive conceptions and 
launch farther out it begins to get shadowy. 

Every one is conscious of this fact; sometimes we 
are with a friend, one whom we know to be a true, 
sympathetic friend, conversation lags, we know that 
the brain is settling down into a state of repose, nothing 
but idle thoughts are gently flitting through the brain, 
everything is quiet; gradually a consciousness steals 
over us that we are in close communion with our friend. 
It is entirely a different sensation than that which we 
experienced when in friendly conversation, the sensa- 
tion grows stronger and stronger until both parties 
start as if wakened from a reverie. The spell is broken, 
the brain seems to be aroused into instant activity. 
This is a condition that is beyond the reach of argu- 
ment. It is like presenting an object to the eye for 
inspection, each one must see for himself, and decide 
for himself what he sees or whether he sees anything. 
Again we leave the reader sole umpire in the case, as 
to whether this is purely a spiritual communion, or the 
listless action of the brain. There is no profit to be 
derived from wandering in the barren desert of specu- 
lation, or bewildering ourselves with the mirage of 
our own imaginations. Yet we can cautiously reach 
out and grasp many things without becoming lost in 



The Soul Spiritually Considered. 199 

the myth of idle speculation. To cast everything over- 
board that we don't understand is weakness. To at- 
tempt to explain what we don't understand by unmean- 
ing or ambiguous terms is folly. To make a patient 
and intelligent investigation of everything "under the 
sun" is the part of wisdom. 



CHAPTER XL 

RELATIONS OF THOUGHT TO BRAIN. 

In former chapters we have discoursed upon thought 
as a product of force, or the result of force, or the 
manifestation of force, and that this thought force was 
capable of transmission in many ways. We purpose 
in the present chapter to examine more minutely into 
the intimate relationship of thought and the brain, as 
to how thought is produced by the brain, and what 
relationship exists between thought and what we call 
sensation. In chapter 8 we give quite a full anatomy 
of the encephalon taken from Gray's Anatomy, ac- 
cording to the latest edition to which we had access. 
Recent investigations, however, have thrown a flood of 
light upon the minute structure (anatomy) of the brain. 
These investigations and discoveries have caused the 
limits of the unknown to perceptibly recede, and many 
conditions that were formerly not understood are now 
plainly revealed. While we have taken considerable 
space to give the anatomy of the encephalon, in order 
that the investigating reader might examine the inti- 
mate relationship that exists between the parts and 
organs of the cerebral axis, we deem it essential to our 
purpose to examine more fully into the details, as far 
as relates to our subject, in order that a better and more 
accurate understanding of cerebral activity may be 
mo*'* *>V inly shown. In this we will follow Dr. J. Luys 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 201 

in his work, "The Brain and Its Functions." And we 
trust this acknowledgment will be sufficient without 
further quotation or reference. 

Dr. Luys was most patient and painstaking in his 
methods of investigation. In the work above quoted 
from, Dr. Luys confines himself to the cerebrum. In 
order that the reader may have some idea of the 
thoroughness of his work, we well briefly give his 
methods of study. He would take a fresh brain and 
subject it to a bath of chromic acid, which had the effect 
of hardening the brain, giving it a firm consistency, so 
that it could be shaved in thin slices without destroy- 
ing its texture. Dr. Luys then invented a machine by 
which he could shave the brain in thin slices about one 
millimeter (about one-twenty-fifth of an inch) in thick- 
ness. The bath of chromic acid gave the slices a green- 
ish tint, which rendered them imperfect for photo- 
graphing, he then subjected the slices to another bath 
that reduced the color without affecting the texture. 
This rendered them photogenic, and perfect photo- 
graphs were taken. He would now take a brain pre- 
pared as described, and commencing at the apex, hori- 
zontally shave down to the base. Then he would take 
another brain and commencing at the front, shave back- 
ward, cutting it vertically. Then he would take an- 
other and commencing on the side shave vertically as 
before. Thus he would have the brain shaved in three 
directions, all the slices carefully photographed. Then 
with a microscope of 800 diameters magnifying power 
he was enabled to examine the minute structure of the 
brain with a thoroughness and minuteness hitherto un- 



202 The Unknown Made Known. 

known. He could by this process trace a fiber, milli- 
meter by millimeter, from its origin to its terminus, and 
examine the cellular formation of the gray matter 
and learn much about the intimate relationship of vesi- 
cle and fiber. 

Before giving the results of Dr. Luys' discoveries, 
we deem it proper to make a preliminary statement. 
The substance of the brain is divided into two general 
classes — vesicle and fiber. The vesicular portion con- 
stitutes the gray substance enveloping the brain, and 
the ganglions at the base and center of the brain, while 
the fibrous portion constitutes the white matter in the 
interior of the brain. While these two formations in 
their full development are sharply distinguishable, the 
one merges into the other by such imperceptible gra- 
dations that the dividing line has never been discovered. 
This follows the law that one form of matter imper- 
ceptibly merges into another. With this preliminary 
statement we will now proceed to give recent dis- 
coveries in the anatomy of the brain. 

The gray matter that envelopes the brain is called 
the cortical substance — -cortex of the brain. The fold- 
ings or convolutions of the brain are for the sole pur- 
pose of giving increased surface to the brain. The 
thickness of this cortical substance in the adult is about 
two or three millimeters (about 1 / 10 th of an inch). 

This cortical substance is composed of a fixed an- 
atomical element — the nerve cell. These nerve cells 
are arranged in strata or layers, they are pyramidal in 
form, with the apexes pointing to the surface. They 
vary in size, the smaller are near the surface, the larger 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 203 

are deeper. The larger ones about twice the size of 
the smaller, the transition from large to small cell is 
by insensible gradations. The nerve cells give off from 
their substance a species of very delicate, root-like, 
hirsute fringe which gradually spreads out on all sides 
forming a network, and by this means the cells are all 
united or bound together and by this arrangement they 
can vibrate together. These layers or zones of cells 
are all parallel and are bound together by a delicate 
network called the neuroglia, which extends through- 
out the entire nervous system, and is a bond of union 
to both vesicle and fiber. As the base of these nerve 
cells point inward, it is through their bases that they 
connect with the nerve fibers or at least with a portion 
of them. The nerve cells in addition to the hirsute 
fringe they give off, also give off certain prolongations 
or arms that reach out and are lost in the surrounding 
tissue. Some idea of the number of these cells may be 
had from the following data : In a space of cortical 
substance equal to one square millimeter and of a 
thickness of Viotfi of a millimeter, 100 to 120 nerve 
cells have been counted. From this we can see that the 
number in the entire cortical substance is almost be- 
yond computation. But the most curious and interest- 
ing discovery is the constitution of the nerve cell itself. 
It is now known that the body of the cell is a true 
tissue consisting of very delicate fibrillse interlaced like 
the wicker-work of an osier basket, and has a tend- 
ency to agglomerate toward the nucleus of the cell, 
which thus becomes a true point of concentration, that 
the nucleus is not homogeneous, that it is endowed with 



204 The Unknown Made Known. 

a special structure, radiated in appearance; and that 
lastly the nucleolus, considered as the final expansion 
of the nerve cell is in its turn divisible into secondary 
filaments. 

Imagination is confounded when we penetrate into 
the world of the infinitely little, especially when we 
think that each of these little organs has its autonomy, 
its individuality, its minute organic sensibility, that it 
is united with its fellows, that it participates in the 
common life, and above all that it is a silent and inde- 
fatigable worker in psychic activity according to the 
different calls which are made upon it, and set it 
vibrating. 

The following illustrations are to be inserted in their 
proper places in chapter XL. The are taken from 
Dr. Luys' work, "The Brain and its Functions," pub- 
lished by D. Appleton and Company, New York, 1897. 
Fig. 1. — Half -diagrammatic figure of the cerebral 
cortex, with legend. 

Fig. 2. — Cortical cells of the deeper zones at about 
800 diameters, with legend. 

Fig. 3. — Diagram of the commissural fibers of the 
anterior regions of the brain, and legend. 

Fig. 4. — Diagram of the commissural fibers on the 
level of the corpus striatum, and legend. 

Fig. 5. — Diagram of the converging fibers and their 
relations to the central gray ganglions, and legend. 

Fig. 6. — Diagram of the sensori-motor processes of 
cerebral activity, and legend. 

We deem it important to here call attention to 
what seems to be a vital fact that has hitherto been 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 205 

overlooked by anatomists and psychologists, that when 
we descend through the infinitely delicate structure 
of the cell to its final base, or beginning, we find the 
point where that mysterious element that we call life 
meets and communicates with matter, and as all the 
cells interlock, communicate and vibrate in unison, and 
are hence indispensable members of the whole body, 
the accumulated action of life, on, or in, each cell, 
makes the living body. The food that we eat generates 
what we call energy. This energy is consumed, or 
stored, in the formation of new cells that are formed to 
take the place of others consumed in the transmission of 
the energy in them stored. This transferred or re- 
leased energy is used for two purposes. In the cere- 
bral organs to give force to thought- vibrations. In 
the general body to generate muscular force. These 
cells have the power, or property, of propagation, and 
thus leave their offspring to continue their unfinished 
work, obeying the same law that governs all living 
bodies, either vegetable or animal. This power of 
propagation is communicated to them by the active 
principle that we call life, and life is a creature of 
divine power. This power of propagation is increased 
by legitimate use, as we see in muscular and mental 
action, till the limit of the powers of life are reached, 
when a decadence sets in, which in normal conditions 
ends the allotted lifetime of that particular body, 
either vegetable or animal. This we call death. If 
the doctrine of evolution, as generally understood, was 
true, that all the manifestations of life were simply 
the automatic action of matter, improvement would 



206 The Unknown Made Known. 

continue indefinitely, and under normal conditions there 
would be no death. But when we acknowledge the 
existence of a divine power, a preintelligence that 
designed and ordered everything, the mists float away 
and we can see clearly the hand that irresistibly directs 
all things. 

The nerve fibers which represent the bond of union 
between the cortical substance and the central regions 
of the brain, emerge from the midst of the plexus of 
cells. They all at first appear as isolated filaments, as a 
derivation, mediate or immediate, from the tissue 
proper to each cell; then by degrees, as they proceed 
between the ranges of cells, they enlarge their sheath 
thickness, the interposed fatty substance becomes more 
abundant, and they are insensibly transformed from 
gray to white fibrils. 

From the above analysis it is easy to see why it is 
impossible to discover the absolute beginning of the 
nerve fiber. All we can say in safety is that the nerve 
fiber has its origin in the cell, but we see the cell itself 
is resolvable into filaments, hence we become lost. 

The white substance of the brain is composed of a 
series of tubules. These tubules are for the protection 
of the nerve fibers which they encase. Inside of these 
tubules and surrounding the nerve fibers is an oily 
substance, which forms, as it were, a fluid isolating 
body between these two elements. 

These thousands of nervous elements, thus consti- 
tuted, emerge isolatedly from the different zones of 
the cortex, either directly from the essential protoplas- 
mic structure of the nerve cells, or indirectly by spring- 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 207 

ing from the midst of the intercellular tissue in the 
form of gray transparent fibrils covered with an ex- 
ceedingly delicate sheath. Here seems to be indicated 
two origins, one from the internal protoplasmic struc- 
ture, the other from the fibrous network that forms the 
covering for the cell. We will have occasion to refer 
to this further on. 

These white fibers are divided into two, if not four 
classes. First, those which emerge from the cortical 
of one hemisphere, pass over and are lost in the cor- 
tical substance of the opposite hemisphere, and are 
called transverse fibers. The second class or group, 
are those which emerge from the cortical substance of 
either hemisphere and pass to the ganglions at the base 
and center of the brain. These are called converging 
fibers. This class may be subdivided, those which 
emerge from the opticus thalamus and pass to the cor- 
tex, and those which arise in the cortex and pass to 
the corpus striatum. This would make three classes. 
Especial attention will be called to these fibers further 
on. 

There is also a fourth class of fibers which are those 
that connect together different parts of the same hemi- 
sphere, these are called longitudinal commissural fibers. 

The central mass of gray matter situated at the base 
and center of the brain, called the optic thalamus, of 
which, the anatomical structure and general functions 
were scarcely known until recently, is found to be a 
body of great importance. It is in a manner the great 
central depot of the sensory nerves. It is composed 
( 1 ) of a series of small isolated ganglions of gray mat- 
ter, situated one behind another in a line which runs in 



208 The Unknown Made Known. 

an antero-posterior direction; (2) of two slender 
bands of grayish material, lining the internal surface 
of the third ventricle, and continuous with the gray- 
matter of the spinal cord, which thus ascends into the 
interior of the brain. 

I. The isolated ganglions are four in number. 
They form successive tuberosities on the surface of 
the optic thalamus, which gives it the multilobular ap- 
pearance of a conglomerate ganglion. It has recently 
been discovered that these little isolated centers act as 
foci for different kinds of impressions which are con- 
veyed to their substance. Thus, the anterior center is 
shown to be in direct connection with the olfactory 
nerve. Immediately behind comes the middle gang- 
lion which seems to be in close relation to the optic 
nerve. Behind this is a small ganglion, about the size 
of a pea, called the median center. Finally, behind, in 
the neighborhood of the superior tubercula quadri- 
gemina we find another ganglion, of which the con- 
tours are in general vaguely defined, and which con- 
stitutes the posterior center. 

Up to the last few years the functions of this mass 
of gray matter which forms the optic thalamus was an 
insolvable problem for anatomists. Dr. Luys' investi- 
gations led him to the following conclusions. As has 
been stated, the anterior or first ganglion was asso- 
ciated with the olfactory nerve, the second or middle 
center is associated with the optic nerve, the third or 
median center is connected with sensitive impressions, 
and the fourth or posterior, with auditory impressions ; 
and that thus, in their central order of classification, 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 209 

isolated sensorial impressions find independent halting 
places grouped along the same line, and in an order 
correlatively similar to that which presides over their 
mode of distribution in the peripheral regions of the 
system. 

It is curious, indeed, to observe in a human head, 
when examined in profile, that the olfactory organs of 
the nose are first met with in the most anterior plane; 
then the visual organs, the eyes, in the second line; 
the sensitive organs in the third ; and finally, the audi- 
tory, the ears, occupying the most posterior place ; and 
that, further, in their mode of distribution in the cen- 
tral ganglions of the cerebral mass those same impres- 
sions are grouped in isolated independent ganglions, 
occupying, as regards one another, a taxonomic order, 
which is in a manner only a repetition of their mode of 
origin in the peripheral regions. 

These facts, which have shed quite a new light upon 
the anatomical and physiological functions of the optic 
thalamus, have found their confirmation, on the ex- 
periments of physiology, and on the other hand, in the 
clinical examination of symptoms, which are, in those 
matters, the irrefragible criterion of every truly scien- 
tific doctrine. 

Thus, Dr. Edouard Fournie, in a series of experi- 
ments made on living animals by means of the injec- 
tion of irritating substances into different parts of the 
optic thalamus, succeeded in annihilating such or such 
sensorial impressions, according as the traumatic lac- 
eration had attacked such or such a ganglion of the 



210 The Unknown Made Known. 

optic thalamus. Thus, he succeeded in annihilating 
vision, sensation, smell, etc. 

There exists, indeed, a typical observation made by 
Hunter, which manifestly confirms what has just been 
said. 

In this observation he recounts the curious history 
of a young woman who, in the space of three years, 
successively lost the sense of smell, sight, hearing, and 
sensation, and who gradually sank, remaining a 
stranger to all external impressions. When the 
autopsy of her brain was made, it was found that the 
optic thalami of each hemisphere, and the optic 
thalami alone, were attacked by a fungus hsematodes, 
which had progressively destroyed their substance. 

2. The central region of gray matter which, as we 
have seen, lines the internal walls of the optic thalami, 
represents an elongation into the brain of the central 
gray matter of the spinal cord. 

It presents the appearance of two tracts of ashen 
gray matter, which here and there form protuberances, 
which are themselves individually connected with the 
nerve fibrils which are implanted in them. Such are 
the gray protuberances of the septum, for the internal 
olfactory roots; those of the tuber cinareum, for the 
optic fibers; and the mammillary tubercles and pineal 
gland, for the connecting fibers emanating from the an- 
terior centers. 

It similarly receives a certain contingent of gray 
ascending fibers, which probably represent the cen- 
tripetal spinal fibers which are distributed in the 
plexuses. 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 2 1 1 

The center is composed of a network of anastomos- 
ing cells, forming a continuous plexus. 

A direct examination of the relation of the centers 
of the optic thalami to the different regions of the cor- 
tical periphery enables us to determine the following 
peculiarities also: 

It is sufficient to cast a glance over horizontal sec- 
tions of the brain to recognize that each of these cen- 
ters is more particularly in connection with certain re- 
gions of this very cortical substance. Thus, for in- 
stance, we see plainly that the central ganglion, by 
means of the white fibers that emerge from it, appa- 
rently radiates the impressions it condenses toward the 
antero-lateral regions of the brain, and that the poste- 
rior center acts in the same manner as regards the re- 
gions of the posterior corniia; while the median center, 
by means of the divergent fibrils which are implanted 
in its mass, appears to direct its radiations indifferently 
toward all parts of the cortical substance. The ante- 
rior center, less distinctly attached to the cortical sub- 
stance, seems, nevertheless, to have its special area of 
distribution in the gray matter of the hippocampus. In 
the animal species in which the olfactory organs are 
well developed, this convolution similarly exhibits a 
high degree of development. 

These anatomical data, which every one can observe, 
throw a completely new light upon the long discussed 
question as to cerebral localizations, and are direct 
evidence that there are in the different regions of the 
cortical substance isolated circumscribed localities, af- 
fected in an independent manner, for the reception of 



212 The Unknown Made Known. 

such or such kinds of sensorial impressions. We are 
thus logically led to comprehend that the peripheral 
development of such or such a sensory organ is de- 
signed to have a receptive organ in some way adapted 
to it in the central regions, and that the richness of 
nerve elements of such or such a region of the cortical 
substance itself, and the degree of proper sensibility 
and specific energy of each of them, may, at a given 
moment, play an important part in the sum total of 
mental faculties, and thus determine the temperament 
of the specific activity of such or such an organization. 

We thus recognize the fact that the secret of certain 
aptitudes — of such or such a native predisposition, is 
naturally derived from the preponderance of such or 
such a group of sensorial impressions, which find in 
the regions of psychical activity in which they are 
particularly elaborated a soil ready prepared, which 
amplifies and perfects them according to the richness 
and degree of vitality of the elements placed at their 
disposal. 

Finally, the plexuses of the central gray matter, 
which are similarly united to the different regions of 
the cortical substance, show us that stimuli radiated 
from the depth of visceral life ascend, with the organic 
tissue which carries them, as far as the interior of the 
brain ; and that they are thus carried into the different 
regions of the cortical substance, and associated with 
the essential phenomena of psychical activity. 

From this double induction we are led to consider 
the masses of gray matter, usually described under the 
name of optic thalami, as essentially central regions 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 213 

which are the bond of union between the various ele- 
ments of the entire cerebral system. 

Through their tissues pass vibrations of all kinds, 
those which radiate from the external world, as well 
as those which emanate from vegetable life. 

THE CORPUS STRIATUM. 

The mass of gray matter designated by the name of 
corpus striatum is the complement of the optic thala- 
mus, with which it constitutes those two gray gang- 
lions which occupy the central region of each hemi- 
sphere, and which are, as has been frequently pointed 
out, the natural poles around which all the nervous 
elements gravitate. 

While the optic thalami present, in a manner, masses 
of gray matter grouped around the prolongation of the 
posterior columns of the spinal axis, of which, speak- 
ing in general terms, they form the crown, the corpora 
striata are, on the contrary, situated on the prolonga- 
tion of the antero-lateral columns. They, therefore, 
evidently occupy an anterior situation as regards the 
optic thalami; and in connection with this subject it 
is not without interest to remark that the same relation 
that exists in the whole of the spinal cord is here 
reproduced with obviously analogous characteristics. 

In the cord the sensitive or excito-motor regions 
©ccupy the posterior portions, while the essentially 
motor regions occupy the anterior. 

In the brain the same relations as to neighborhood 
and the same correlative arrangements exist. Indeed, 



214 The Unknown Made Known. 

while the optic thalami with their different ganglions 
represent the regions of passage for sensorial impres- 
sions, the gray matter of the corpora striata, with its 
multiple elements, represent the place of halt and rein- 
forcement for motor stimuli radiating from the cere- 
bral cortex. 

It may therefore be said that in the brain, by 
virtue of the same anatomic arrangements, the regions 
where the phenomena of sensation occur, and those in 
which motor stimuli are elaborated, reciprocally main- 
tain the same topographic relations that they have in 
the different portions of the spinal cord proper. 

The white converging fibers which group them- 
selves around the optic thalamus, before arriving at 
their destination encounter a more or less considerable 
thickness of the corpus striatum, which they traverse 
from one side to the other, at various angles and in 
various directions. The anterior convergents in par- 
ticular, which run toward the corresponding regions 
of each optic thalamus, plunge from before backward 
into the very mass of the corpus striatum, and divide 
it into two segments, one extra- and one intra-ventricu- 
lar. 

The color of the gray matter of the corpus striatum 
is sensibly homogeneous, wherever it is observed. It is 
flabby, reddish, and composed of special anatomical 
elements. It is, moreover, permeated by an infinite 
number of whitish serpentine filaments, which repre- 
sent the terminal expansions of the antero-lateral 
motor fibers of the spinal cord. 

In the internal and inferior regions, however, where 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 215 

there is a confluence of all the antero-lateral fascicles 
of the spinal axis which expand into the corpus 
striatum, we come upon a very clearly circumscribed 
region of firmer consistence, and yellowish color, 
which is easily recognized by its peculiar striation. 

This peculiar circumscribed mass of yellowish mat- 
ter, which Dr. Luys has particularly designated under 
the name of yellow nucleus of the corpus striatum, 
plays an important part, as a center of radiation for 
nerve-fibers, in its relations with the ultimate expan- 
sions of the cerebellar peduncles. 

The structure of the corpus striatum must now be 
considered, as regards: 

1. The study of the gray matter, regarded from a 
histological point of view, and as to the characters of 
its elements. 

2. That of the nervous elements, of various origin, 
which enter into relation with those proper to itself. 

1. The gray matter of the corpus striatum is histo- 
logically composed of an infinite number of large polyg- 
onal nerve-cells with multiple prolongations, their 
size being in general about the same as that of the 
larger cells in the cerebral cortex. These cells, con- 
sidered in themselves, present characters common to 
all the other cells. They are provided with what ap- 
pear to be a nucleus and nucleolus, and present ram- 
ified prolongations which rapidly taper away, and 
constitute with those of the neighboring cells a very 
dense and a very delicate network. 

Besides these large cells just mentioned, we also 
meet with elements of smaller size, especially in the re- 



216 The Unknown Made Known. 

gion of the yellow nuclei, where they are extremely 
abundant. Their histological characters recall in a 
more or less vivid manner the similar elements met 
with in the deeper zones of the gray matter of cerebel- 
lar convolutions. These small elements, of which the 
nucleus is voluminous, and of which the yellowish 
color enables us to distinguish them from the sur- 
rounding corpuscles of the neuroglia, exhibit a fringe 
of radicles of extreme tenuity, which is lost in the net- 
work formed by the large cells. It seems then, prob- 
able that these small cells, which to some extent histo- 
logically represent the cerebellar element, enter more or 
less directly into combination with the radiations from 
the large cells which represent the cerebral element. 

Besides these two principal elments, we have still to 
describe the corpuscles of neuroglia, derived more or 
less directly from the sheaths of the capillaries, and a 
considerable number of vessels which directly pene- 
trate from below upward into its interior in the form 
of more or less rectilinear filaments. 

2. The diverse elements which enter into the ana- 
tomic constitution of the corpus striatum, are divided 
into two special groups: i, some may be considered 
as a system of fibers afferent to the corpus striatum; 
2, others as a system of efferent fibers. 

i . The first group comprehends : a, on the one 
hand, all the cerebral fibers radiating from the differ- 
ent regions of the cortex, and lost in the substance of 
the corpus striatum (cortio-striate fibers) ; b, on the 
other hand the ultimate expansions of the superior 
cerebral peduncles, which are lost in the mass, and 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 2 1 7 

which represent the specific importation of the cere- 
bellar element into the constitution of motor phenom- 
ena. 

a. The elements of the first group, which on account 
of their origin and termination, are called cortico- 
striate, belong to that mass of convergent fibers which, 
radiating from all points of the cortical periphery, and 
probably from the psycho-motor regions so clearly 
determined at the present day, "take a common direc- 
tion toward the central ganglions. This order of 
fibers, however, once arrived at the circumference of 
the thalamus, instead of terminating like their fellows, 
only embrace it. Arrived at the frontier of the optic 
thalami and the corpora striata, these fibers are im- 
mediately reflected from below upward, in the form 
of spiroid lines, and are finally isolatedly distributed in 
the different cell-territories of the corpus striatum with 
which they are especially connected. 

These cortico-striate fibers, which have come out of 
the depths of the cortical layers with the sensitive 
fibers, still proceed for a certain distance through the 
brain, in juxtaposition with these latter, as is also the 
case in the peripheral nervous trunks, which are com- 
posed of both sensitive and motor fibers, embraced in 
the same envelope. Soon, having arrived in the pres- 
ence of their respective centers of attraction, they each 
obey their innate affinities, and are distributed, some to 
the centers of the optic thalamus, others to the different 
regions of the gray substance of the corpus striatum. 

Here is clearly pointed out two sets of fibers, one 
efferent that carry sensations from the optic thalamus 



218 The Unknown Made Known. 

to the cortical substance, the other afferent fibers that 
carry sensations to the corpus striatum from the cor- 
tical substance. 

Their precise origin in the different regions of the 
cortical substance is still a problem to be solved for 
each of them in particular. This is also the case as re- 
gards their central distribution in the different cell- 
territories of the corpus striatum. At the present day 
they are only known and anatomically demonstrable 
in an intermediate portion of their transit, at the mo- 
ment when they are reflected in the form of serpentine 
fibers ; and yet their existence, as centrifugal con- 
ductors of motor stimuli, radiating from the excitable 
zones of the cerebral cortex, is very clearly demon- 
strated. This is one of the most interesting points that 
experimental physiology has brought to light in recent 
times. 

b. These afferent elements of the second group, 
as we have already indicated, are represented by the 
terminal expansions of the cerebellar peduncles. 

The superior cerebellar peduncles, in fact, after in- 
ter-crossing in the median line, become associated and 
form two masses of gray matter, described by Stilling, 
and recognizable by their reddish color. 

These two ganglions, as regards their structure and 
connections represent a veritable focus of radiation for 
cells and nerve fibers, give rise throughout all their 
antero-external substance to a series of fibrils, inter- 
laced in a thousand ways, which all terminate in the 
form of yellowish filaments, in the gray matter of the 
corpus striatum. It is this special contingent — an indi- 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 219 

rect emanation from the active elements of the cere- 
bellum — that gives to this particular department of the 
corpus striatum, that characteristic yellowish color, 
which has been described under the name of the yel- 
low nucleus of the corpus striatum. 

These fibrils of cerebellar origin which are disposed 
in the form of yellowish rayed filaments, taper away 
insensibly, and embrace the white spinal fibers which 
expand in the corresponding regions of the corpus 
striatum ; and are probably lost in the network of large 
cells, as has been previously suggested. 

Now, how do they terminate ? What is the ultimate 
mode of combination of the individual elements which 
represent in the brain the activity of the cerebellum? 
How does the cell of the corpus striatum come into 
contact with the cerebellar elements of the new im- 
portation ? 

Here, Dr. Luys makes a pause, and confesses he is 
only able to form conjectures, and awaits the results 
of future researches for an answer. Further on we 
will give this matter our attention, and hope to be able 
to give an analysis of this peculiar and interesting ar- 
rangement that will clear up matters. At present we 
will continue Dr. Luys' anatomy. 

However it may be, we cannot help considering the 
corpus striatum, from a dynamic point of view, as 
being indirectly connected with the phenomena of 
cerebellar activity, and seeing in the superior cerebellar 
peduncles, in the red ganglion of Stilling, and in the 
yellowish radii which emerge from them, so many cen- 
trifugal conductors, incessantly active foci of nervous 



220 The Unknown Made Known. 

radiation, which allow the cerebellar motor influences 
with which they are charged to overflow into these 
plexuses. 

The cerebellar innervation, is thus intimately asso- 
ciated with the vital phenomena of the corpus striatum 
as a true vital force. It is incessantly overflowing into 
its thousand plexuses like a continuous current of elec- 
tric force, and, as it were, charges its nerve-cells. In 
motor phenomena it is associated with all our motor 
acts, and gives to our movements their regularity, their 
force, and their continuity. Under a thousand forms, 
in fact, it silently disperses itself through all the con- 
scious and unconscious actions of the organism, and 
seems to be an indispensable component of every motor 
act whatsoever. 

2. The elements of the second group, those which 
constitute the mass of the efferent fibers of the corpus 
striatum, are represented by that series of nerve-fibers 
which are ordinarily described under the name of 
cerebral peduncles, and which, grouped in the form 
of isolated fascicules, and arranged in a spiroid fash- 
ion, pass in succession, after having traversed the 
pons, to be dispersed in the different segments of the 
spinal axis. These fibers, which represent conductors 
interposed between the different cell-territories of the 
corpus striatum and the different ganglions of the 
motor nerves of the spinal cord, are not distinctly iso- 
lated at their point of origin in the plexus of cells of 
the corpus striatum. 

All that we can say of them is, that they appear by 
insensible degrees in the form of whitish traces creep- 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 221 

ing over the gray matter of the extra- and intra-ven- 
tricular ganglions; that soon they increase in volume; 
that converging like the rays of a fan, they all ap- 
proach the yellow nuclei of the corpus striatum; that 
they gradually enter into contact with the yellow fibers 
which constitute the substance of these bodies; and 
that when, after condensation, they emerge from the 
corpus striatum, they present themselves in the form 
of three demicones, one inclosing the other. In a hori- 
zontal section of this region, these three demicones 
present the appearance of three semi-circular concen- 
tric lines. 

These nervous elements, having been thus arranged 
and reinforced by the union of different masses of 
gray matter belonging to the cerebellar innervation 
(gray matter of Sommering, gray matter of the pons) 
pursue a descending and oblique course, which causes 
them (on a level with the medulla) to pass insensibly 
into the opposite regions of the spinal axis. Little by 
little, and fascicle by fascicle, they separate, to dis- 
tribute themselves in the different segments of the 
spinal cord, and in the different groups of motor cells 
of the antero-lateral regions. These, regularly strati- 
fied one above another, like a series of electric ma- 
chines always ready to start into action, silently await 
the arrival of the stimulating spark destined to call 
them into activity. 

Thus it follows, from what we have just explained, 
that the corpus striatum, like the optic thalamus, is a 
nervous apparatus with multiform activities. It is a 
common territory into which the cerebral, cerebellar, 



222 The Unknown Made Known. 

and spinal activities come in succession, to be com- 
bined, and we might almost say, to anastomose. It 
thus represents, from a dynamic point of view, a syn- 
thesis of multiple elements. 

It is in the midst of its tissues that the influence of 
volition is first received at the moment when it emerges 
from the depths of the psycho-motor centers of the 
cerebral cortex. There it makes its first halt in its de- 
scending evolution, and enters into a more intimate 
relation with the organic substratum destined to pro- 
duce its external manifestations — in one word, mate- 
rializes itself. 

From this moment it comes into intimate contact 
with the innervation radiating from the cerebellum, 
and is now no longer itself, no longer the simple purely 
psycho-motor stimulus it was at its origin. It is asso- 
ciated with this new influence, which gives it somatic 
force and continuity of action. It then passes out of 
the brain by means of the peduncular fibers, combined 
with a new element, and pursuing its centrifugal 
course, it is finally extinguished here and there by set- 
ting in motion the different groups of cells of the spinal 
axis, whose dynamic properties it thus evokes. 

We see then, to sum up, by means of this physio- 
logical sketch, what an all-important part these two 
central ganglions play in the phenomena of cerebral 
activity, and how completely different is the mode of 
action of each. 

The foregoing gives the salient points of Dr. Luys' 
investigations in cerebral anatomy. We have, perhaps, 
included some things a trifle foreign to our subject, 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 223 

but we thought it was best to err in giving too much, 
than to give too little, and by this means leave the sub- 
ject more obscure. 

Dr. Luys has woven into his anatomy many of his 
ideas of physical activity, psycho-motor force, that 
could not very well be left out without impairing his 
anatomy. While we may differ with Dr. Luys in some 
of his deductions we acknowledge the great debt we 
owe him for his wonderfully lucid and exhaustive 
anatomy of the brain. 

REMARKS ON THE FOREGOING ANATOMY. 

From the foregoing anatomy there are some facts 
and conditions that are very prominently brought to 
view that were heretofore quite obscure, or at least 
but imperfectly understood. We see that the mass of 
the brain is resolvable into two elements — vesicle and 
fiber. We see that the vesicle is intimately associated 
with what we denominate nervous or cerebral activity. 
We also see that the fiber is a means of communica- 
tion or transmission. In attempting to trace a nerve 
fiber to its absolute origin, we come in contact with 
that great law of nature, in which one form impercept- 
ibly merges into another form without forming a well 
defined line of separation. We know that the fiber 
originates in a plexus of cells, but just where the union 
takes place the microscope has not revealed. The 
sanctum sanctorum of nature has never yet been en- 
tered by mortal man. We can trace natural phenomena 



224 The Unknown Made Known. 

to its door and there we stop, the flaming sword pre- 
vents our entrance. 

From Dr. Luys' researches we learn one thing pretty 
certain, that part of the nerve fibers spring from the 
internal filamental structure of the nucleolus, and part 
from the hirsute fringe that springs from the invest- 
ing membrane of the cell. From this we are led to 
believe that one is the motory nerve and the other the 
sensory. If the sensory merges with the hirsute fringe 
the motor springs from the nucleolus. This would 
complete the circuit. This is largely conjecture; we 
will have to wait for more thorough research to de- 
termine this point. 

The vexed question as to where the focus or central 
point of the cerebral axis is located, seems to be pretty 
well settled by Dr. Luys' researches. Dr. Luys seems 
to think that the two ganglions, the optic thalamus and 
the corpus striatum make a sort of double foci. But 
this would make a sort of dual government that would 
result in confusion. Reason dictates that there must 
be a unity of restraining and directing force and power 
somewhere, no other position is tenable for an instant. 

It seems plain that the corpus striatum is the abso- 
lute headquarters for all cerebral phenomena. Let us 
see if we can give a solution to this problem by an 
analysis that will enable us to see mental manifesta- 
tions in a clearer light than they have heretofore been 
considered. 

It has been conclusively demonstrated that light and 
sound are vibrations — a form of motion. We under- 
stand that the different colors and the different shades 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 225 

of color are simply the different lengths and fre- 
quency of vibrations in the luminiferous ether. We 
know that many blind persons, whose touch has been 
carefully and thoroughly educated, can distinguish 
colors by the touch. This leads us to the fact that the 
same conditions that enable the eye to distinguish 
colors enable the touch to distinguish colors, hence 
touch or feeling and sight are the same thing only 
under different conditions. The vibrations produced 
by a certain condition of matter produce both sensa- 
tions. The sense of smell and taste are likewise re- 
solvable into vibrations. Some things we feel are 
harsh and unpleasant to the touch, others are pleasant 
and agreeable; some things that we see are painful to 
the eye, others are pleasing; some things that we hear 
are harsh and grating to the ear, others, melodious and 
agreeable. So it is with taste and smell. It all de- 
pends on the character of the vibrations produced, 
whether the sensation is agreeable or disagreeable. 
Everything that reaches the seat of sensation must be 
reduced to vibrations, and the character of the sensa- 
tion is determined by the arrangement of the vibra- 
tions. The melody of music depends on the harmoni- 
ous arrangement of the vibrations of sound. It is the 
purpose and function of the nervous system to arrange 
and put in order and systematize the vibrations so that 
they will be definite information to the soul or ego, 
just as it is the purpose and function of the printer to 
arrange and put in order his type so that the reader 
can comprehend the meaning thereof. The nerve 
fibers carry the various vibrations to their appropriate 



226 The Unknown Made Known. 

destination. It is well for us to bear in mind that there 
are two classes of nerve fibers in the general system; 
they are called sensory and motory nerves. If there is 
any disturbance at the extremities the sensory nerves 
carry the sensation to the nerve centers, then the mo- 
tory nerves carry the mandate for a remedy to its ap- 
propriate place. The writer of this had this experience 
when a stroke of paralysis was settling upon him. I 
could ride in a buggy, hold the lines and direct the 
horse, when I could not feel what I was doing with 
my left hand. The sensory nerves were paralyzed, the 
motory nerves were in normal condition. This demon- 
strated that the functions of the nerves were not inter- 
changeable. This peculiar condition amounts to a law 
in the nervous system. Every part of the nervous sys- 
tem has its special function. Every section of the brain 
has its allotted work to perform. It can do no more 
nor no other. That it must do when called on, if in 
normal condition. The cerebral cortex, the great 
thought generator, has no discretionary power what- 
ever. It must work when ordered to do so, and settle 
into repose when so directed. Every nerve or nerve 
fiber can transmit a vibration in a particular direction 
and in no other. 

All anatomists agree that the gray or vesicular mat- 
ter is in some way intimately associated with nervous 
activity, and that the white or fibrous matter simply 
transmits vibrations, or as they usually say, nervous 
stimuli (whatever that may mean). In short, that the 
gray matter is active and the white matter is passive. 

Now let us take a sensation at its inception and trace 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 227 

it to its destination and see what we will encounter and 
see what we will discover. Suppose we see a fruit tree 
loaded with ripe fruit. At the first glance of the tree, 
hanging full of its luscious fruit, the vibrations of light 
carry the impression of the tree with its fruit to the 
retina of the eye, from there the vibrations carry the 
impression, through the optic nerve to the optic thala- 
mus and to the proper ganglion in the thalamus. Now, 
suppose that at this instant we are listening intently to 
the strains of sweet music that is so delightful that it 
occupies our entire attention. On the arrival of the in- 
formation that a fruit tree has been discovered, the 
announcement is made to consciousness or to the soul 
or ego (bear in mind that the optic thalamus and cor- 
pus striatum are connected by commissural fibers), 
and a mandate goes forth to the optic thalamus, which 
is the conceded point of convergence and distribution, 
to stop paying any further attention to that music, and 
let the information about the fruit tree take prece- 
dence, and the proper region of the cortical substance 
is aroused into instant action to devise a plan to secure 
that fruit. 

Now, pardon a digression that we may make things 
clear. We know that the circulation of the blood is 
divided into two parts — the arterial and the venous. 
We also know that arteries after leaving the heart di- 
vide and subdivide until they terminate in the arterial 
capillaries. We also know that when the veins leave 
the lungs they in like manner divide and subdivide till 
they likewise become venous capillaries. The exact 
point where the two capillaries meet has never been 



228 The Unknown Made Known. 

revealed by the microscope; they imperceptibly blend, 
and that is all we can say about it. But in this blend- 
ing we notice a most interesting operation. In this 
blending the blood seems to ooze through the cellular 
tissue, and at this point there is an assortment of ma- 
terial which takes place. 

For the repair of muscle the proper material is de- 
posited in the proper place. That for the repair of 
nerve is likewise deposited, all with perfect intelligent 
order and system. The most systematic and intelligent 
operation of which it is possible to conceive. We 
might remark here, that in this delicate and compli- 
cated operation, we are coming in close proximity to 
the seat of life, as explained on a former page. We 
have made this statement in order to have something 
to reason from by analogy. We now go back to where 
we left off. 

The sensation conveying the information of the fruit 
tree is given the right of way and the efferent nerve 
fibers of the optic thalamus convey the information by 
vibrations to the proper regions of the cortical sub- 
stance. Here transpires one of the most interesting 
operations in all nature. It seems to be a kind of men- 
tal digestion. We remember how delicate and compli- 
cated is the plexus of cells in the cortical substance; 
how they are so delicately bound together by that in- 
finitely complicated network called the neuroglia; how 
infinitely varied these cells are in size, and how they 
are bound together by their own arms so that they can 
vibrate in unison and in harmony; then with the sus- 
picion that is almost a certainty that one class of fibers 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 229 

terminate in the nucleous, and the other spring from 
the fringe of the investing membrane of the cell, we 
see the circuit completed. In this marvelously com- 
plicated and delicate structure the vibrations of the 
impression of the fruit tree are so modified by some 
mysterious process in one of nature's sanctum sanc- 
torums, so that when transmitted by the afferent fibers 
of the corpus striatum to that body they become so 
delicate that they can be taken cognizance of by the 
spirit, or soul of man, another place where spirit 
and matter meet and communicate. Thus the soul, or 
ego, becomes possessed of the information . relative to 
the fruit tree, and a plan is instantly perfected by 
which the fruit can be procured. The plan thus per- 
fected is dispatched from the corpus striatum to the 
cerebellum, the great dynamo of the cerebral axis, 
where the executive orders are transmitted to the 
proper place, by the motory nerves, and the fruit is 
procured. 

In order to understand this, let us view this opera- 
tion from another standpoint. The seeing of the fruit 
is a sensation. All writers on philosophy, psychology, 
and metaphysics agree that all sensations are physical, 
or physiological in character. The conception, or per- 
ception, either or both, that the fruit was there and 
could be procured, all will concede, is purely spiritual 
or metaphysical in character. The question now con- 
fronts us : How and by what means was this physic- 
al sensation transformed into a spiritual conception 
or perception? What is the link or bridge that con- 
nects the two? Dr. Borden P. Browne in his "The- 



230 The Unknown Made Known. 

ory of Thought" says : "Along with the receptivity of 
sense, but distinct from it, we see a special order of 
activity which works over sense data into rational 
forms." Again, "A process whereby the mind works 
over the sense material of the sensibility into the forms 
of intelligence." And there he leaves us in the dark 
without a lantern. Is there any way to get any light 
into this dark place? Let us see. We have seen that 
in nature one form or condition imperceptibly passes 
into another unlike form or condition without any well 
defined line of demarcation. We see the motory 
nerves meet and communicate with the muscles with- 
out our being able to determine the exact place of 
meeting. We know that when the conception, which 
is spiritual, leaves the nerve and passes through a pe- 
culiar substance, that anatomists have not yet named 
or described, and reaches the muscle it becomes a sen- 
sation, which is physical. Here a simple spiritual form 
is transformed into a simple physical form. This is 
not a theory, it is a fact. In the case in hand we have 
a complicated physical condition that passes into a 
complicated spiritual condition. Let us try to ex- 
amine this delicate and complicated operation as care- 
fully as we can, with what light we have, and see if 
we can learn anything about the modus operandi of 
this miraculous procedure. 

We have seen something of the wonderfully com- 
plicated and delicate structure of the brain and of its 
accompanying ganglions. We have seen that the cor- 
tical substance is a cellular formation, with infinite va- 
riety in the size of the cells. (This is for a purpose, 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 231 

an end.) We have seen that the body of the brain is 
a mass of microscopic fibers, each enclosed in a deli- 
cate sheath, so that perfect isolation is maintained. All 
these fibers are classified and have their functions. 
There are converging and diverging fibers. There are 
efferent and afferent fibers, and commissural fibers. 
Each fiber can convey a message in one direction, and 
in one direction only. By this means the cortical sub- 
stance is in communication with all its parts and with 
the central bodies, or ganglions. Now, when a sensa- 
tion reaches the opticus thalamus it is from there dis- 
patched to the appropriate organ of the brain to be so 
modified and arranged so as to be suitable to be trans- 
mitted to the corpus striatum and there to be commu- 
nicated to the soul or ego. When a sensation is 
"worked over" (as Brown would say), and is in pre- 
sentable form to be transmitted to the corpus striatum 
it is no longer a sensation but thought. When this 
thought passes through the ganglion of the corpus 
striatum it receives an additional modification which 
renders it suitable to be taken cognizance of by the soul 
or ego. It is now no longer thought but a conception 
or perception. The peculiar operation that takes 
place in the cortical substance in "working over" a 
sensation is sometimes called "mental activity." When 
a sensation is thus "worked over," modified, system- 
atized and properly arranged it becomes thought. 
When thoughts are systematized and properly ar- 
ranged so as to be taken cognizance of by the soul or 
ego they become conceptions or perceptions. An or- 



232 The Unknown Made Known. 

derly arrangement of conceptions or perceptions be- 
comes knowledge. 

To get a clearer understanding of this mental proc- 
ess, let us take a sensation and follow it through this 
"working over" process. We will take the sensation 
of a beautiful red rose. When that sensation reaches 
the opticus thalamus it is immediately transmitted to 
the organ of color. Now, there are a great many 
things to be considered about a red rose besides its 
color. When the organ of color begins to "work over" 
that sensation into thought it finds a great many things 
that do not fall within its special function. It can de- 
termine color and nothing else. Other conditions have 
to be referred to their appropriate organs. Hence the 
need and use of the different kinds of nerve fibers to 
convey requests and answers. Hence in working sen- 
sation up into thought there is a constant flashing back 
and forth through this wonderful telephonic system 
until the thought is worked out. We can see the in- 
dications of this "mental activity" in the countenance 
of a person when he is "intently thinking," as we say, 
about some matter of great moment. In this opera- 
tion the "mental activity" is the subjective and the 
thought is the objective. But when the thought is 
dispatched to the corpus striatum it becomes the sub- 
jective and the conception becomes the objective. Lit- 
tle do we realize, when talking with a friend, how 
messages are flashing back and forth through his brain 
with inconceivable rapidity. 

This seems to be a proper place to introduce an- 
other thought, or an explanation of a mental condition. 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 233 

or a mental organization. It is a conceded fact that 
certain parts of the brain are adapted to certain kinds 
of thought. Thus, certain localities produce thoughts 
of music, and certain localities produce thoughts of 
size. Now, it is plain that there can be no compari- 
son made between music and size. They are as ir- 
reconcilably constructed as sight and sound, save that 
fhey are both produced by vibrations. It would be 
just as impossible for the organ of size to take cogni- 
zance of the vibrations of music as it would be for the 
eye to take cognizance of sound. We understand that 
the difference in colors is simply, and only, the differ- 
ence in the length and frequency of the vibrations of 
light in the ether. Hence we can see that all sensations 
are simply differently arranged vibrations. And that 
the cortical substance of the brain must be keyed to 
chord with the vibrations of a sensation before it is pos- 
sible for it to "work over" a sensation into thought. 
Hence the necessity of differently constructed portions 
of the cortical in order to produce different thoughts ; 
and hence the different intellectual organs. Thus we 
can see how it is that when an organ of the brain is 
finely and largely developed the thought produced is 
clear and strong. 

Just what effect the other bodies or ganglions at 
the base of the brain have upon thought is not yet 
known. But it is to be hoped that patient investiga- 
tion may yet unfold their functions and reveal to us 
the part they play in the wonderful mechanism of the 
"dome of thought." 

These considerations bring us to the contemplation 



234 The Unknown Made Known. 

of the infinitely delicate and complicated structure of 
the brain, its organs and ganglions. We can easily see 
how small a derangement or disturbance is necessary 
to seriously interfere with mental operations. We can 
readily understand that the normal operations of this 
exquisitely delicate organ can be easily deranged or 
entirely destroyed. When we consider these facts we 
are appalled at the recklessness of the man who will 
deliberately subject his brain to the action of narcotics 
or stimulants. The fads and isms that are rending so- 
ciety are constantly in evidence of the abnormal condi- 
tion of the cerebral organism. It is plain that the 
brain, in order to produce the clearest and purest 
thought must act with the greatest possible precision. 
The nearer perfect the condition of the brain, the more 
satisfactory will the results be. The above explana- 
tion is certainly clear and logical, and harmonizes the 
structure of the brain with the character of sensation. 
We know of no conflicting proof. 

This wonderfully complicated arrangement seems 
to be for the sole purpose of so modifying or temper- 
ing the vibrations of the air or luminiferous ether 
that they in a sense become spiritualized or become of 
such a delicate nature that they can be communicated 
with by spirit. We see in this complicated operation 
that the various degrees and kinds of sensations are 
caused by like various degrees of vibrations. This 
brings us back to the proposition that thought is a 
product of vibrations. We have also seen that the ul- 
timate destination of sensation is the seat of conscious- 
ness. Local ganglia may have subordinate duties to 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 235 

perfom, but they are under control of the great cen- 
tral power. This brings us to the proposition that 
sensation is only made manifest at the seat of con- 
sciousness. That the nerves in the proper sense of 
the term do not feel at all, they simply transmit the 
vibrations to the seat of consciousness where cogni- 
zance of the peculiar character of the sensation alone 
is taken. This is clearly demonstrated by an inci- 
dent that often happens. A person having an arm 
amputated can still feel the fingers after the arm has 
healed and gotten entirely well, showing conclusively 
that the feeling is not in the fingers but at the seat of 
consciousness. By analogy we can reach out a step 
further and see that the cortical substance is not the seat 
of consciousness, but that it is only a workshop where 
material is prepared for the use of the predominating 
spirit or soul of man, which alone exercises or has 
power to control and direct the operations of the en- 
cephalon. The performer on the piano simply causes a 
certain combination of vibrations, it is not music until 
the harmonious combinations of the vibrations are per- 
ceived by the inner consciousness of the hearer, else all 
this complicated mechanism of cerebral organization 
would be useless. As there is no superfluity in the 
universe, we are compelled to admit that the cerebral 
organism is, in some way, for the purpose of modifying 
the vibrations of sensations in order that they may be- 
come knowledge. In the presence of this wonderfully 
delicate, complicated arrangement we stand con- 
founded and aghast ! 

We have seen that vibrations are produced by force, 



236 The Unknown Made Known. 

and only by force, and it is only by the force of vibra- 
tions that the cortical substance is aroused into activity. 
The cortical substance would remain silent and inactive 
until the dissolution of death were it not aroused by 
some force external to itself. Just as a muscle would 
remain flaccid and inactive were it not aroused into ac- 
tion by some force external to itself. Just as well say 
that original innate power to act exists in the cellular 
texture of the muscle as to say that psychical activity 
originates in the cortical substance. Both are creatures 
subject to a directing power. From the very nature of 
things there must be some initial starting point, some 
centralized intelligent power that controls and directs 
everything, otherwise the whole human system would 
become a perfect bedlam of uncontrolled and undi- 
rected activity, an impossible existence. The force in 
the material world has its origin in the sun. What the 
secret spring of power in the sun is will probably ever 
remain a secret to man. Light and heat are the great 
dual forces in animal and vegetable development. 
There may be various contrivances to generate light 
and heat (a sort of local ganglions) but the original 
source is the sun. So in the nervous system, there 
may be ganglions and vesicular matter by which rein- 
forcing force may be generated, but back of all this 
there must be an original initial force, upon which all 
depends, and without which we would have death. 
Just as if the sun should instantly cease to exist, death 
and dissolution would be the fate of every thing 
earthly. 

By these reflections we are irresistibly driven to the 



Relations of Thought to Brain. 237 

conclusion that the seat of consciousness is the seat of 
force (perception and power) ; and that this duality 
constitutes the soul of man. This analysis makes the 
operations of the intellect more clear and comprehen- 
sible, and disperses many of the befogging problems 
that have hitherto bewildered us. 

When we consider the number of organs or bodies 
clustered together in the centre of the brain, whose 
functions are not now understood, we may look for- 
ward with hopeful eyes to the time when investigations 
now in progress will disclose many things that will be 
instructive. 

From the foregoing analysis and solution we can 
readily see the cause of great variety of thought mani- 
fested among different individuals. The soul or ego of 
man becomes outwardly manifested according to the 
structure of the brain at its disposal. It is absolutely 
helpless to do otherwise. True, the texture and struc- 
ture of the brain can be improved and developed so as 
to be almost transformed, thus giving the soul enlarged 
capacities and powers. By disuse and improper use, 
the organs and structure of the brain can be degener- 
ated and debased till its original powers can scarcely be 
discerned. The soul can do and accomplish anything 
that the material through which it is compelled to oper- 
ate will permit. The power or capacity of the brain 
can be improved and enlarged by systematic use and 
discipline just as surely as the muscles can be strength- 
ened by systematic training. Little, frail Dr. Winship 
strengthened his muscles by systematic training till he 
could lift a weight of 3,000 pounds. The limit of mus- 



238 The Unknown Made Known. 

cular development has never yet been reached. The 
limit of speed of the trotting horse has not been 
reached. Precisely the same laws of mental develop- 
ment apply. As researchful thought is systematically 
trained the limits of the unknown continue to recede. 
The history of man in his development from the most 
revolting savage to his present high state of civilization 
and enlightenment is in evidence confirmative of this 
fact. The query irresistibly comes up, when will this 
advancement cease? When we can trace thought into 
the innermost recesses of its laboratory we are on the 
highway of discovery of the means that will give 
thought additional powers, which will lift man into a 
higher state of excellence. The cheering thought is, 
no perceptible limit is in view. "It does not yet appear 
what we shall be." 



CHAPTER XII. 

EVIDENCES OF A SUPREME BEING. 

Every reader is conscious of the fact that we some- 
times know a thing, that we have a sort of internal con- 
viction that thus and thus is true, but we are troubled 
to frame language to give expression to our thoughts. 
This leads us to the conviction that thought and lan- 
guage are entirely different, and not necessarily associ- 
ated. Thought is the concrete result of the reasoning 
faculties. Language is a clumsy vehicle by which 
thought is transferred to another. 

We sometimes have convictions in reference to per- 
sons, things or conditions, in which we are very clear 
in what we believe or know, but are unable to translate 
our thoughts into language so as to clearly and accu- 
rately convey our thoughts to another. The time will 
probably never come when the finer subtilities of 
thought will be clearly expressed by language. We 
know that the thoughts of some people are muddy, dis- 
connected and uncertain, while the thoughts of others 
are clear, sharp and incisive. This depends upon the 
structure, fineness and discipline of the brain that 
grinds out the thought. As thought is limitless in its 
variety the best we can do is to strike a general average 
and take that as a standard. 

The average man, the natural man, as Shedd would 
say, is conscious of the fact that there is something 



240 The Unknown Made Known. 

within him that is not material, a something that domi- 
nates and controls him. He is quite clear on this point 
and no amount of sophistry can dislodge that convic- 
tion. He is also clear on another point — that this 
something is the real personality. Every one knows 
that the material body is constantly changing. Some 
physiologists say that the whole body, except perhaps 
the bones, is changed in ninety days. We see how rapid- 
ly the body wastes away in case of sickness where there 
is no nutriment assimilated to supply the waste. Be all 
that as it may, we know that the change is rapid and 
constant. We know that the material body that we now 
inhabit is not the same body that we inhabited a short 
time ago. But this invisible something, this dominat- 
ing spirit does not change, it is not wasted by sickness 
nor built up by nutriment. The hand that writes these 
lines is not the hand that caught the ball in boyhood 
days. But the spirit that dictates these lines is the same 
spirit that engaged in the ball game. This we know 
from memory. Ask us what memory is and we have 
no language to specifically express our conception of 
that quality or faculty. We may say that it is the 
power to retain mental impressions that have passed, 
but some things we can't remember and some things we 
can't forget, so we are liable to get tangled up in our 
definitions. But we all know that this mysterious 
faculty exists. The memory of what has been said and 
done decides the fate of the prisoner at the bar. No 
fact in nature is more firmly established than that we 
have the faculty of memory. With this unquestioned 
fact, and this unquestioned manner of establishing this 



Evidences of a Supreme Being. 241 

fact, as a kind of base to reason from by analogy, we 
can establish other facts with equal certainty, that will 
not submit to a mathematical demonstration. 

To attempt to formulate an analysis or a solution that 
will conclusively demonstrate the existence of a Su- 
preme Being is difficult, because the Supreme Being is 
purely spiritual, and the analysis must of necessity be 
largely of a physical nature. It is hard to draw a com- 
parison between physical things and spiritual things, 
or between physical conditions and spiritual conditions, 
because they are so unlike. 

Perhaps we might be able to get some light on the 
subject by the aid of a little allegory. 

We will take the earth and things of the earth 
just as they are, with all the people engaged in their 
several occupations. We will introduce two special 
characters ; one we will call a guide, who we will sup- 
pose is familiar with all the affairs of the earth; the 
other we will call a visitor to whom everything is new 
and strange. Another condition is that neither of these 
persons, because of some imperfection in their vision, 
can see the people. They can see everything else and 
all that is going on, can even see what the people are 
doing, but can't see the people. They are intelligent 
and can understand the general purpose of all things, 
can trace cause and effect, but they can't see the people. 
Thus equipped the guide takes his visitor and starts out 
to show him the earth and all things therein. 

They first come to a beautiful farm. The guide says : 
"Here is one of the beauty spots of the earth, see how 
regularly and orderly these trees are growing ; see what 



242 The Unknown Made Known. 

a nice sward beneath them, see that nice enclosure that 
protects them from depredation by stock. And see that 
large pasture enclosed with a substantial fence to keep 
that splendid herd of cattle from getting out and others 
from getting in. And see that large barn just large 
enough to hold provender for the stock to eat during 
winter, also room enough to house the cattle during the 
inclement winter weather. See this large water-tank, 
and this wind-mill, that pumps water for the stock, and 
see those beautiful fowls running around the barn-lot, 
see how beautiful and regular their color. And over in 
this inclosure you see those stately fruit trees, many 
of them loaded with luscious fruit. Over in that shed 
is a wagon. Notice how symmetrical it is, where strain 
will be greatest there is greatest strength. The wagon 
is used to transport material of various kinds about the 
farm, and from the farm to distant points and back 
again, as occasion may require. The wagon is pro- 
pelled by horses hitched to it. There is strong harness 
in a room in that barn that goes on the horses to enable 
them to draw the wagon. Notice how symmetrically 
every thing is arranged, and how every thing is 
adapted to its purpose. And passing across the road- 
way we see this magnificent mansion. That is to adorn 
and beautify the farm. Think how blank it would look 
without it. Notice the beautiful lawn that surrounds 
it; observe those beautiful shade trees, and see those 
evergreens ; how artistic the tops grow. And see over 
in that inclosure what a beautiful garden, see what an 
abundance of small fruit, and what a profusion of 
sweet flowers loading the air with their perfume, Now 



Evidences of a Supreme Being. 243 

notice the apartments of this mansion, see how sym- 
metrical and regular the approaches, see the delightful 
hallways, and how the rooms and apartments are taste- 
fully decorated and orderly arranged." 

"Yes," says the visitor, " I see all these things and 
admire them very much, but I don't see how all this 
came to be so systematically arranged. Why do those 
trees grow in rows, and why are they protected by an 
inclosure? How came that herd of stock to be in 
the pasture? How came that barn to be just where it 
is needed ? How came that tank of water to be so con- 
veniently located to supply the wants of the stock? 
And why this mansion, and for what purpose ? What 
is it that puts the team to the wagon, and what directs 
and controls the team ? " 

"Oh," says the guide, "that is all very easy to account 
for. There is an unseen inherent force that is insepa- 
rable from matter and is constantly impelling it to take 
new forms." 

" But," says the visitor, " it seems strange that this 
force should act with such regularity and order and 
apparent intelligence." 

"Oh," says the guide, " there is a set of laws that is 
inherent in matter, that causes this action to be system- 
atic, and to be constantly producing new forms and 
developing old ones. This system of force and law 
that brings all these things into existence we call evolu- 
tion. As we go on and see more of this systematic de- 
velopment you will understand more about its work- 
ings. As we pass on, we come to a cluster of 
mansions. We call this a village. You see most of the 



244 The Unknown Made Known. 

buildings are mansions. You see the herds of stock 
and large barns are wanting. The mansions are more 
tastefully decorated. You observe as the mansions in- 
crease in number and beauty the out-buildings decrease 
in prominence. This is a leading feature in evolution, 
the higher forms are more beautiful. You see a new 
feature introduced here. You see buildings here that 
are points of collection and distribution. You see some 
things coming in and others going out. A sort of ex- 
change depot. You also observe that there are little 
centres for repair. You see some implements coming in 
broken and others passing out repaired. Oh ! my 
friend, you will find out as we proceed and investigate 
that there are marvelous beauties about evolution. It 
is a regular, orderly system of development, in which 
higher forms and conditions are constantly being devel- 
oped or evolved from lower forms. But let us pass 
along. We now come to a much larger collection of 
mansions, they are much larger and there is a greater 
display of taste. We also see that these depots of ex- 
change are a great deal larger and more numerous. 
The little repair centres have evolved into manufactur- 
ing establishments. We also see that the public wagon 
road has become much more substantial. The wagon 
has become what we call a car, and the team of horses 
has become an engine, and instead of the cars running 
on the ground they run on an iron track. Instead of 
one wagon to a team we have many cars to an engine. 
They run much faster and carry much heavier loads. 
By this enlarged system of transportation vastly more 
merchandise can be transported for exchange and dis- 



Evidences of a Supreme Being. 245 

tribution. You see this evolution is a wonderful 
system of development. We have a new feature of 
transportation introduced here. You see a large river 
flowing by, and on its waters steamboats ply and aug- 
ment the transportation facilities. These steamboats 
have evolved from the most primitive form of water 
craft." 

"But," says the visitor, "I don't understand the pur- 
pose of this great increase or accumulation of man- 
sions. What have they to do with this transportation 
and exchange ? " 

" Oh," says the guide, " they are to beautify and 
adorn the place. That is a part of this great system of 
evolution. This collection of mansions and depots of 
supply and distribution and manufacturing we call a 
city. You can readily see if the mansions with all their 
surroundings, their shrubbery, their flower gardens, 
their lawns and their fountains were taken away, how 
desolate and smoky and monotonous the city would be. 
You see by this system of evolution everything is 
beautified and adorned, even the common weed by the 
roadside is adorned with beautiful flowers. But let us 
pass on and see the culmination of this beautiful system 
of evolution. As we pass on we come to a much larger 
aggregation of mansions and depots of supply and dis- 
tribution, mammoth manufacturing establishments now 
appear. Railroads have been multiplied enormously. 
The mansions in magnificance and splendor far surpass 
anything we have seen. The ocean has taken the place 
of the river, and monstrous ocean steamers have taken 



246 The Unknown Made Known. 

the place of the wheezy steamboat. You see the devel- 
opment by evolution is simply wonderful." 

" Yes/' says the visitor, " I see all these things that 
you have shown me. I have observed the regular and 
gradual building up of that you have pointed out, and I 
admire it. But I can't for the life of me see how the 
cause you ascribe can produce the effect that we ob- 
serve. I can't understand how the various kinds of 
material would be forced to go to the place just where 
they were needed with such remarkable regularity and 
with such wonderful precision without the directing 
hand of some supervising intelligence. There certainly 
must be an intelligent personality somewhere that de- 
signs and causes to be executed this wonderful system 
of improvement, advancement, and development." 

" Oh," says the guide, " I see you don't understand 
this wonderful system of evolution. Let me explain to 
you how this growth and development is all brought 
about by natural causes, and by the operation of natural 
laws. You see that wheelbarrow loaded with bricks 
going along the street. Now you understand that if 
it was not for the support rendered by the wheelbar- 
row those bricks would instantly fall to the ground. 
You understand that this would be caused by the oper- 
ation of what we call the attraction of gravitation. The 
attraction of gravitation is an inherent property of mat- 
ter, it is a part of the life of matter, it causes matter to 
move or holds it still while resting on a support. It is 
ever present with matter and hence is inseparable from 
matter. There are other forces that are properties of 
matter that are as potent as the attraction of gravita- 



Evidences of a Supreme Being. 247 

tion, but act differently. You understand that the at- 
traction of gravitation draws matter toward the centre 
of the earth, else the globe could not exist, and it is 
necessary for the globe to exist, hence this attractive 
force. You understand that whatever is necessary, is, 
that is one of the irrevocable conditions of nature. The 
fact that we don't understand them is of no conse- 
quence, we are compelled to accept facts as we find 
them, whether we understand them or not. Now you 
see plainly that that wheelbarrow is moving and you 
know that there is force that causes it to move. Those 
bricks are needed for the construction of yonder build- 
ing, and the force that is causing the bricks to move in 
that direction is acting precisely upon the same prin- 
ciple as the attraction of gravitation ; it is forcing mat- 
ter to go where it is needed; one is just as easy to un- 
derstand as the other. There are innumerable other 
forces that are incessantly working, each performing 
its allotted function, and all working together to ac- 
complish the marvelous development that you observe. 
These silent forces are the life of the universe. It is 
just as difficult to understand why matter exists, as to 
understand why these forces exist. It is just as diffi- 
cult to understand how a beautiful fragrant flower can 
be evolved from an unsightly weed by the action of 
force and matter as to understand why that magnifi- 
cent mansion should be evolved by like causes. You 
see evolution proceeds step by step. You see that 
magnificent ocean steamer. Trace it back to its origin 
and you find a log floating down a river, then the canoe, 
then the oar boat, then the galley, then the sailing ship, 



248 The Unknown Made Known. 

then the steamboat, then the ocean steamer. Then we 
have evolution in land transportation. We first have 
the tiny pathway of the ant, then of mice, then of rab- 
bits and hares, then the hog path, then the wagon road, 
then the macadamized road, then the rail road. You 
see evolution is a beautiful system and works uniformly 
and systematically. Every thing we see is for the pur- 
pose of producing a higher order than itself. The 
stopping of this process of evolution simply means 
death to every thing. This process of development 
that we call evolution is the sole object and purpose of 
what we call nature." 

" I see what you have shown me and hear what you 
have to say," says the visitor, " but I am not satisfied 
with your explanation. There are too many gaps left 
open, too many inconsistencies, too many superfluities, 
too many uncertainties. Take this mansion, you say it 
is an ornament, that it is to beautify and adorn the city, 
to give to the city a beautiful and pleasing appearance. 
That does not account for the many peculiar arrange- 
ments that we find. All the surroundings, approaches, 
arrangements and fixtures indicate unmistakably a util- 
itarian purpose. Everything about them and within 
them indicate that they are for the occupancy of intelli- 
gent beings. While the mansions in the city are much 
more elaborate than those in the country and village, 
there is a similarity in their arrangements and furnish- 
ings that indicate that they are inhabited by like beings. 
Again, you make a comparison between the attraction 
of gravitation and the forces you imagine produce your 
evolutionary development. I can't see where the com- 



Evidences of a Supreme Being. 249 

parison is applicable. The attraction of gravitation 
acts uniformly. It attracts all matter indiscriminately 
to the centre of the earth. Or, to be more specific, it is 
that attraction which attracts all matter together with- 
out regard to kind or condition. You imagine an at- 
traction that will construct a building, that will place 
stone and bricks and mortar and wood and iron and 
paint in the appropriate place to make a building espe- 
cially adapted for a particular purpose. It seems to me 
that the reasonable and logical explanation for all this 
would be that these mansions are for the abode of intel- 
ligent beings that design, construct, direct and control 
all these things you have shown me." 

" Oh," says the guide, " that would not work. By 
your plan you would have a multitude of directing in- 
telligences that would produce no end of clashing and 
confusion, while one intelligence was projecting one en- 
terprise, another would be engaged in some obstructing 
scheme ; this would bring on inextricable complications. 
So your plan would be fraught with as many difficulties 
as you assert mine would be." 

" But," says the visitor, " you fail to see the real dif- 
ference between the two plans. In your plan an un- 
conscious force of unknown origin, without design, 
systematically evolves a complicated system. My un- 
derstanding is, that there is a supreme, omnipotent, 
intelligent personality that antedates everything. That 
everything that we see accomplished is the result of a 
preconceived design. Hence all your apprehended fears 
of clashing between these minor intelligences van- 
ishes because they are under direction of an omniscient 



250 The Unknown Made Known. 

intelligence that controls everything. How there can 
be an intelligent purpose accomplished without intelli- 
gence is incomprehensible to me. If ever) purpose is 
the conception of intelligence, then we concede that 
intelligence antedates purpose, and your evolution be- 
comes a myth. By your plan, there is neither design 
nor a supervising individuality, simply the blind action 
of a blind self-existing force that is without parentage 
or author, a condition that is repugnant to reason." 

The above is roughly drawn, and perhaps in some 
instances a trifle extravagant. But in making illustra- 
tions we sometimes go to extremes in order to bring out 
sharply and strongly the idea we wish to present. We 
have taken conditions and affairs with which we are 
all familiar, and in which we understand perfectly well 
how improvement and development is accomplished, 
and ascribe reasons for them that are perfectly ab- 
surd, so that by analogy we can see the futility of at- 
tempting to account for the diversified phenomena of 
the universe by saying that it is all accomplished by 
the operation of blind laws or conditions. Every mor- 
tal man knows that he has to plan, and contrive, and 
design in order to bring things about as he wants them, 
and then, because of his imperfection, failure is no sur- 
prise to him. No man has the temerity to assert that 
a plan or a design will mature itself without a person- 
ality behind it. Thus we can reach out into a higher 
life, into a spiritual life, with the assurance that anal- 
ogous conditions prevail. That while we in our weak- 
ness and imperfections stumble along and make mis- 
takes, there is a higher intelligence who is all-wise, all- 



Evidences of a Supreme Being. 251 

powerful and absolutely perfect, so that to err is im- 
possible. Such a conception dispels our fears and 
doubts and awakens within us an insatiable desire to be 
in close communion with such a being. When we sur- 
vey the earth and contemplate the heavens, and con- 
sider that He who placed Pleiades in distant space and 
hung out Orion as a lamp to guide the comets in their 
distant and wearisome flights is the same intelligence, 
the same being, that created the life by which the corti- 
cal substance of the convolutions of the brain was 
formed, in its intricate structure, we have something 
that satisfies our longing desire for a personality that is 
the creator and the director of all things. But when 
we attempt to destroy this personality and place in its 
stead a cold, unthinking natural law, or a blind force, 
we turn away in vacant despair, conscious of our aw- 
ful failure in finding something to satisfy the cravings 
of the soul. Away with such trashy sophistry, and let 
us hold fast to that which is good. 

" But," says the skeptic, " I want to be given some 
logical reason that will establish the identity of a Su- 
preme Being beyond doubt or question. I would 
be glad to believe it if I could be furnished with evi- 
dence that amounted to proof, so that I could know that 
a Supreme Being exists. Plausible declarations are 
very pleasing, but they are not necessarily evidence that 
establishes a fact." 

Well, let us see if we can construct a course of rea- 
soning that will carry convictio.i to a reasoning intelli- 
gence. 

First, how do we know any thing ? In former chap- 



252 The Unknown Made Known. 

ters we think we have explained how we receive im- 
pressions through the senses. How evidences of ex- 
ternal things and external conditions reach the 
understanding. We hear a sound, we see an object, we 
feel or taste a substance, and smell an odor. These 
sensations pass through the proper channels and are 
transmitted to the cortical substance of the brain, where 
they are reduced to thought and finally reach the seat of 
consciousness as knowledge. This is knowledge by 
perception or sensation, the lowest, crudest order of 
knowledge; the only kind of knowledge the lower ani- 
mals possess. He who insists on sensorial evidence to 
establish the existence of a Supreme Being and will ac- 
cept no other unconsciously places himself on a level 
with brutes. Happily there is another class of evidence 
that is above and far superior to the sensorial. True, 
they imperceptibly merge into each other so that we can 
find no sharply defined line of separation, but in their 
character they are radically different. It is generally 
conceded that sensorial or perceptive knowledge is the 
base of reasoning or intellectual knowledge. That is, 
that the sensorial antedates the intellectual in the order 
of creation. 

We read the history of a nation; the knowledge of 
their form of government, their manners and customs, 
etc., is purely intellectual, but we receive this knowl- 
edge by the aid of the senses. We follow a course of 
reasoning in mathematics, that is purely intellectual, 
but most of us get our knowledge through books and 
instructors. But some person or persons traced the 
course of reasoning in mathematics", originally, without 



Evidences of a Supreme Being. 253 

the aid of the senses, but they had to use the senses to 
lead others to this knowledge. Thus we can perceive 
how the intellectual and sensorial are entirely different 
in their nature, and yet they meet and communicate. 
Another instance where the material and immaterial 
meet and communicate. This intellectual existence, for 
it is an existence, is purely a spiritual existence. He who 
will not concede that is dead to intellectual conceptions. 
And everyone knows that this intellectual existence is 
what controls him. He who will not concede that he 
possesses this intellectual personality is non compos 
mentis, and it is folly to spend time trying to get him to 
comprehend an intellectual proposition. 

Let us illustrate by a story. While the writer was in 
the army he acted as drill-master in two regiments. In 
each regiment I found an incorrigible subject, one was 
a white man, the other was a negro. Neither had the 
least conception of the cadence in music. It was simply 
impossible to teach either of them to keep step; they 
could not comprehend it, and could truthfully say that 
they could not understand how the men could keep step 
to the music. Also, the writer was once teaching, and 
had a class in geometry ; in the class was a young man 
who could not follow a course of geometrical reasoning 
and dropped the study ; otherwise he was rather bright. 
I afterward learned that he became a physician. Again, 
when Rabbi Wise replied to Col. Ingersoll, he said : 
" We need not pray for Col. Robert Ingersoll's soul, for 
he says he has none, and in this instance we are bound 
to believe him, for he is judge, jury and witness in the 
case; and there may be some men without souls, as 



254 The Unknown Made Known. 

there are some without conscience, others without rea- 
son, and quite a number without principle." These ob- 
servations teach us that when we find a person with like 
mental imperfections, pleasantly change the subject and 
talk about something they can understand. 

There is no person when he sees a rail-road or a sus- 
pension bridge, or a church, or a state-house or any- 
thing that is made or constructed by man, but will 
readily concede that there was an intellectual concep- 
tion or plan before there was a physical compliance, the 
conception must precede the action ; any other position 
would be considered madness by any intelligent person. 
Now, by analogy we can step out into the purely intel- 
lectual or spiritual and say with an assurance born of the 
deepest conviction, that this vast universe was preceded 
by an intellectual conception or design, and that could 
only emanate from a Supreme Being. There is an- 
other important consideration not referred to in the 
above analysis, that is the communion that exists be- 
tween the true child of God and his maker. To this 
many whose eyes fall upon this page can testify ; in this 
they know that they are not mistaken. 

When we take into consideration the irrevocable law 
of nature, that there can be no effect without a cause, 
the above analysis seems conclusive. Any other posi- 
tion would seem to be the rankest absurdity. It would 
be like lifting a weight with a lever without a fulcrum. 






CHAPTER XIII. 

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION. 

In bringing our analysis to a close, we think it proper 
to make a general summary and cast our conclusions 
together, so they may be presented in a condensed 
form. As a foundation for our structure, we take it 
that the universe is the result of the wisdom, power 
and design of the Supreme Being. That this vast, 
complicated structure is not simply for the purpose of 
demonstrating the omnipotence of the Supreme Being, 
but that there is a well-defined purpose to be accomp- 
lished, and that this purpose has been and is being ac- 
complished in the only way possible. We take the po- 
sition that everything that has been accomplished, is 
being, or is to be accomplished, is in accordance with 
fixed and unalterable law; that these laws are abso- 
lutely right, and any change or modification, however 
slight, would be for the worse, because they are perfect, 
and perfection admits of no amendment. That all the 
forces of nature act in a perfect manner, any modifica- 
tion in their strength or manner of action would be 
disastrous. That the Supreme Being acts through 
these laws and forces and with this matter in absolutely 
a uniform manner, the slightest deviation or change 
would be an imperfection. For instance, the attraction 
of gravitation, through all the centuries, acts with abso- 
lute uniformity. It cannot act in any other way. That 



256 The Unknown Made Known. 

is true of all the forces of nature, even the Supreme 
Being himself. He can act in but one way and that is 
the perfect way, and there is but one perfect way. That 
the Supreme Being is purely a spirit, and hence of the 
highest possible form of intelligence and power. That 
matter, "in the beginning," was created by, or was an 
offshoot, or an emanation from a Supreme Being. That 
mortal man cannot possibly comprehend how infinitely 
minute and subtile matter was " in the beginning." 
That every material existence was made by the opera- 
tion of force and law, of or from this minute form of 
matter by direction of a Supreme Being. That there is 
a point where matter is so minute and subtle that 
spirit and matter meet and communicate, and through 
this channel, and this channel alone, can the Supreme 
Being act upon material things. That life is created 
by, or is an emanation from, the Supreme Being, and is 
the unconscious active agent through which He acts 
upon matter by force and law in the production of 
vegetable and animal forms. That this life is exactly 
suited to its allotted work, and can do nothing outside 
its allotted sphere. "Thus far shalt thou go and no 
further," is the irrevocable law that governs in these 
cases. That when in the course of development a new 
form was necessary, a new created life produced that 
form. That one form merges into another by imper- 
ceptible gradations, which culminates in the creation 
of man. That this soul must have a spiritual birth or 
quickening to enable it to inherit eternal life. That 
this quickening must be in accordance with the desire 
of the soul, and that this quickened soul is the purpose 



Summary and Conclusion. 257 

and climax of creation, and that this purpose could not 
be accomplished in any other way. As to what be- 
comes of the souls that are not quickened is a theologic- 
al question that we do not propose to discuss. Neither 
do we discuss the existence or non-existence of a devil. 
We simply discuss positive laws, positive conditions, 
and a positive Creator, and pass by the negative or 
abortive. 

It is impossible for us to conceive or imagine how 
anything can be acomplished other than by force and 
law as active agents. There is no conceivable way for 
sensation to reach consciousness but by vibrations. 
Constant force would be so devoid of variety or change 
that the sensation of varied conditions would be im- 
possible. Hence force must be exerted intermittently, 
and that we call vibrations. There is but one way that 
one intelligence can communicate with another intelli- 
gence, and that is by vibrations. It is not possible to 
conceive of any other modus operandi. There may be 
various media or vehicles by which communications 
may be transmitted, but it must be by vibrations. 
Hence we can see that telepathy is no particular mys- 
tery. This leads us to believe that it may be possible 
for telepathy to be well enough understood so that it 
will be impossible for one person to deceive another. 
Even before the lie is uttered it will be detected. Telep- 
athy is one thing that it is possible for culture to de- 
velop. Every intelligent person certainly knows that 
it is absolutely impossible for him to conceal his pur- 
poses and motives from the Supreme Being. The 
Supreme Being does not have two ways of doing the 



258 The Unknown Made Known. 

same thing. There is but one right way, and that is 
the way that is invariably followed. We are created 
in his likeness — possible likeness. And it is certainly 
reasonable to believe that we can arrive to that degree 
of culture so that we can communicate without the use 
of written or spoken words. We know that we do 
that to a limited extent now. We know that we some- 
times have mental communication that we call telep- 
athy, and why can we not by proper culture cause the 
limit to indefinitely recede? Such a condition would 
instantly dispense with criminal law, because the inten- 
tion of the crime would be revealed before the crime 
could be committed. Hence there would be no crime. 
Great progress has been made in recent years in man's 
knowledge of these peculiar conditions and manifesta- 
tions. This encourages us to look into the future with 
hopeful eyes, that developments will proceed with in- 
creased rapidity, when " Many shall run to and fro and 
knowledge shall be increased." 

The foregoing reflections bring up for consideration 
the grand purpose of creation. It is hard for man in 
his present circumscribed condition and limited facul- 
ties to comprehend the magnitude and comprehensive- 
ness of the vast design. As we think it over and at- 
tempt to grasp the completeness, the perfectness and 
the purposes of the beneficent design, we are filled with 
admiration and thankfulness for the possibilities that 
are thus brought within our reach. And when we con- 
sider that all this complicated universe is but a neces- 
sary complication of cause and effect that is necessary 
to make it possible for us to inherit eternal life, and that 



Summary and Conclusion. 259 

this inheritance is presented to us as a free gift by a 
considerate and loving Creator, and that we in the base- 
ness of our ingratitude spurn this only opportunity of a 
past, present, or future eternity, we are horrified at the 
blackness of our depravity. When we consider that the 
invitation goes thundering down the ages, "Whosoever 
will let him come and drink of the waters of life 
freely," it is about time for us to wake up and seriously 
consider the real purpose for which we were brought 
into existence, and see to it that our inheritance in eter- 
nal life is made sure. He who has had telepathic com- 
munion with his Creator knows that the strongest lan- 
guage is tame and expressionless to give utterance to 
the delightful glow that he experiences during these 
spiritual communions. To tell such an one that all this 
is a hallucination and a delusion is to tell them that their 
eyes do not see, their ears do not hear, and their hands 
do not feel, that their life is a myth and is unreal. If 
every thing on earth was swept away that has been con- 
structed or manufactured or in any way devised for the 
purpose of subserving the wants of man, real or 
imaginary, the earth would be left a howling wilder- 
ness or a barren desert. In like manner, if all the uni- 
verse were blotted out that has been made or created 
for the purpose of making it possible for the perishing 
mortals of the universe to inherit eternal life there 
would be nothing left but an absolute void. That is a 
practical purpose and we can conceive of no other. It 
looks very much as if an absolute void was in store for 
those who failed to receive eternal life. If an absolute 
void is not the extreme opposite of eternal life what 



260 The Unknown Made Known. 

could be? It would certainly be the extreme limit of 
punishment. 

With this we submit the foregoing conclusions to the 
charitable consideration of an indulgent public, con- 
scious that the brain that conceived it is mortal, and 
the hand that executed it is not unerring. Amen. 




Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Oct. 2004 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



